JP7174436B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a predetermined profit can be given to the player. A special game is known. In addition to special games, this type of gaming machine has features such as making the identification information change time shorter than usual, making the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole higher than usual, and identifying information in a specific manner. There are games that can grant predetermined benefits to the player, such as making the probability of stop display higher than usual. Regarding this award, during the special game, a "privilege determination game" is performed to determine whether or not to grant a privilege based on whether or not the game ball that entered the predetermined variable ball entrance passes through the specific area, There is known a gaming machine that notifies the result of the privilege determination game through effects or the like (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-161615 A

In a gaming machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, the possibility of a game ball passing through a specific area is determined by a variable ball entrance related to passage of a game ball into a specific area (hereinafter also referred to as "specific variable ball entrance"). It is common to make it different according to the opening pattern of . However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is to be started. It becomes possible to watch the pattern (opening action). Therefore, for example, at an early stage when the specific variable ball entrance starts to open, that is, at the beginning of the privilege determination game, it may be possible to determine the possibility or presence of passage of the game ball to the specific area. . In this way, if it is possible to determine the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area and the presence or absence of passing through the specific area at the beginning of the privilege determination game, before the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) or the relevant Before the result of the game is announced, it becomes possible to know whether or not the game ball will pass through the specific area. be.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to make it difficult to determine (see through) the possibility of a game ball passing through a specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. To improve the game amusement of a game machine equipped with a decision game.

In order to solve the aforementioned problems, the present invention employs the following configurations.
That is, the gaming machine of the present invention is
identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a payout device that pays out prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the variable ball entrance;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance passing through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising production control means capable of controlling production,
The variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is configured to include multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated. and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
The specific round game and the non-specific round game among the plurality of round games are configured to be continuously executed with a predetermined interval period interposed therebetween,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
The movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the first special game is such that the passage of the game ball to the specific area is greater than the movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the second special game. It is an operation pattern that is facilitated,
The movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the second special game is such that the passage of the game ball to the specific area is greater than the movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the first special game. It is a difficult operation pattern,
The first special game is a special game with a higher possibility of passage of the game ball to the specific area than the second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the execution period when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the specific round game in the second special game When the non-specific round game is executed, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance during the execution period is the same, including a pattern in which the ball can be easily entered into the variable ball entrance. ,
The production control means is
It is configured to be able to execute a variable effect during the variable display of the identification information ,
A specific performance can be executed during the first special game and the second special game, and the specific performance is selected based on a performance mode selected from a plurality of predetermined performance modes. It is configured to be executable in a manner indicating the result of the round game ,
Each of the plurality of effect modes is the same as at least a part of the effect mode of the variable effect that can be executed during the variable display.

According to the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the types of big wins and the opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a special winning opening closing process. 10 is a flowchart of input/discharge number match determination processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the process at the time of start ball entry. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the start of the variable production. It is a flow chart of specific effect start processing. It is a schematic diagram of a second big winning device. It is a table showing the correspondence between jackpot types and ending times. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the release pattern of the 7R fourth big win and the release pattern of the 7R fifth big win. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the V attacker and the specific area in the V round. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the V attacker (short circuit opening) and the specific area in the V round; FIG. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the V attacker (long open) and the specific area in the V round. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of a specific effect performed on an image display device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of a specific effect performed on an image display device; It is a flowchart of a special electric auditors product processing (jackpot game) of the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart of a first big winning opening closing process of Example 2. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a second big winning opening closing process of Example 2. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of input/discharge number match determination processing of Embodiment 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of round counter subtraction processing according to the second embodiment; It is a timing chart showing during the jackpot game of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a table showing a confrontation effect pattern determination table of Example 3; FIG. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the 7R 4th big win and the opening pattern of the 7R 5th big win of modification 1 of the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the release pattern of the 7R fourth big win and the release pattern of the 7R fifth big win in the modification 2 of the first embodiment. It is a table showing correspondence between jackpot types and ending effects.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following description, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed following the end of the variable display of the symbols, a pachinko machine capable of executing a winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profits (for example, prize balls) to the player will be described. , an example to which the present invention is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52 and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and configured to be openable and closable.

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also simply referred to as "effect button 63") is provided. A plurality of production buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game production.

A frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67 for decoration are provided on the front frame 51 . Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or input detection means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good. The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. Also, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4 to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a production pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "production pattern display section") in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as a "production pattern 8") are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect pattern display area 7b is composed of, for example, three pattern display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. Displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4) by the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. The result of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the special symbol propriety determination (Simply referred to as the "appropriate determination") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. Incidentally, any one of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information".

For example, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, the same three-digit number such as "777" (also referred to as "jackpot effect symbol") or a preset chance symbol such as "135" or " It is possible to stop and display the performance symbols with special symbols (also called "special symbols") such as "3*3". In addition, in the case of being out, at least one of the three patterns such as "637" and "373" is different. It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped. In the first embodiment, for jackpots other than the 2R and 7R jackpots described later, the pattern confirmation effect when stopping (confirming display) the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, for example, on the display screen 7a (effect The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed substantially in the center of the symbol display area 7b), etc., so that the player can easily recognize the occurrence of the big win (first performance mode). Regarding, for example, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed small and stopped at the corners of the display screen 7a, or the stop display time is shortened to make it difficult to recognize the occurrence of a big hit (second production mode). We are going to do it with The positions of the left, middle, and right pattern display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (the performance pattern display area 7b). . In addition, as a form of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, there is a form of scroll display in vertical, horizontal, diagonal directions, and the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-described effect patterns (effect pattern game effect), a big win game effect executed along with the big win game, and a display for waiting for customers A demo will be displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the jackpot game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display section) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later, There is a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display section) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect suspension or the second effect suspension, the number of memories of the first special figure suspension and the second special The memory number of the second special figure reservation displayed on the figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect pattern display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it is visible. As a result, the player's sense of anticipation for winning is heightened. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success/failure determination.

On the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starter") having a variable second starter 21 that changes the ease with which a game ball enters. is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol suitability determination ) is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stop-displayed based on the result of the win/loss determination. The variable winning device 22 has a movable member (wing member) 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, there are a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entry") having the first big winning hole 30, and a second big winning hole 35. A second big winning device 36 (also referred to as a “second variable ball entrance”) is provided, and in the first embodiment, the first big winning device 31 (first big winning mouth 30) A second big winning device 36 (second big winning port 35) is arranged above. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 and opens and closes the first big prize winning port 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. That is, the first variable ball entrance 31 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32. can be changed to

The second big winning device 36 also has an opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. That is, the second variable ball entrance 36 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37. can be changed to In addition, the second big winning device 36 specifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass, and a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35. It includes a movable piece 150 for guiding (distributing) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49 . The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). Action is started. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, i.e., when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is guided to the non-specific region 49, and is guided to the specific region. It becomes impossible to pass through 39. On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, i.e., when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is guided to the specific area 39, and is guided to the specific area. 39 can be passed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state, which will be described later, is generated based on detection that at least one of the game balls entering the second big prize hole 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variable operation opening. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31 . Details of the opening of the second big prize opening 35 (opening operation of the opening/closing member 37) and the operation of the movable piece 150 will be described later. It should be noted that the high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a normal determination is made as to whether or not the second start port 21 is to be opened. While the symbol suitability determination is executed, the normal symbols are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed based on the results of the normal symbol suitability determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Furthermore, a plurality of general ball entrances 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game is started, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking to the left. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to winning in the win/loss determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20, the gate 28, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second winning hole are hit to the right. The ball is aimed to enter the big winning hole 35 . Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole, the second starting hole, the first big winning hole, the second big winning hole, and the general ball entering hole, it is determined in advance at each ball entering hole A number of game balls (also called “prize balls”) are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion), and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably displays and stop-displays normal symbols are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination is a hit, and the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, hitting right. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be shot left or right. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 as a trigger. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed. The result of the lottery (special design success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information, specific mode) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), an open pattern according to the type of the specific special pattern stopped and displayed. A special game (jackpot game) for opening the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The pattern of opening the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the first big hit (15R big win), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first big win pattern). Also, when the second big win (12R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R second big win pattern). Also, when the third big win (12R big win) occurs, the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R third big win pattern). Also, when the fourth big hit (7R big win) is achieved, the four LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fourth big win pattern). Also, when the fifth big win (7R big win) is achieved, four LEDs of "mnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fifth big win pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing pattern). On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. For example, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the sixth jackpot (15R jackpot), three LEDs of "abd" are lit and the rest are turned off (15R sixth jackpot pattern). Also, when the 7th jackpot (2R jackpot) is achieved, the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R 7th jackpot pattern). Further, when the eighth big win (2R big win) occurs, three LEDs of "cdgh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R eighth big win pattern). Also, when it is out, two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are extinguished (outgoing pattern). Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED lights up.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a random number for judging whether or not a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special figure. It is stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 85b as suspension. An upper limit is set to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbols Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entered ball, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as "u□v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is extinguished, such as "u●v□". In addition, when the number of reservations is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●".

Also, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the results of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 are displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination by its lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, the out normal symbol is displayed such that only the LED of "t" lights up, such as "s□t■". It should be noted that the normal design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed over a predetermined variable time. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a normal symbol is right or wrong is acquired based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal map reservation in the normal map reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right of normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. And the number of such normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of normal map reservations. be. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", a "game control unit") that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, and game state transition. ”), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a “sub-control unit”, also referred to as a “production control unit”) that performs control related to the performance executed with the progress of the game, payout control that performs control related to the payout of the game ball Substrate 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), production pattern 8 displayed on image display device 7, pattern displayed on production display device 102, production first special figure reservation display 103a, and production second special figure An image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like for controlling the display of the holding display 103b and the like are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear surface side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case is a main control board housing case. is provided with a storage case for image control boards, etc., in which the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 are stored, and a sub control board storage case, in which the sub control board 90 is stored, is provided on the storage case for the image control boards, etc. A case is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure suspension storage unit 85 (first special figure suspension storage unit 85a and second special figure suspension storage unit 85b) and normal figure suspension storage unit 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the non-specific sensor. A region sensor 49a and a general entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second big winning hole 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 out of the game balls entering the second big winning hole 35. be. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls entering the second large winning opening 35. It is something to do. The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, the second big winning solenoid 38 and the movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called "driving means". The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first big winning solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. be. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize device 36 , and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big prize prize device 36 . be. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a general symbol. A holding indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47, and a winning indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like). (which enables ball rental based on the information received) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes the rotation of the shooting handle 60. Detect quantity. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling game effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. there is The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Display control of the device 7, the production display 102, the production first special figure suspension display 103a, and the production second suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, graphics, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production patterns, reserved patterns, etc.). and image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display device 102 consists of two LEDs, and performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect pattern 8, and the effect pattern is displayed by turning on/off the two LEDs, or by combining colors. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of No. 8 (result of special symbol propriety determination). Moreover, the production 1st special figure suspension display 103a and the production 2nd suspension display 103b are also made up of two LEDs. Then, by lighting / extinguishing of two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the production 1st special figure reservation indicator 103a is the number of reservations displayed in the 1st production reservation display area 9c and the 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the displayed pending number. In addition, the second special figure pending display 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. controlled. This is done by displaying character designs on substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (performance design display section), or by operating the movable decorative member 14 to display substantially the entire performance design display area 7b (performance design display section) of the display screen 7a. Such a display is provided because some or all of the production pattern, the first production suspension display part, or the second production suspension display part may not be visible by covering it. . Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100 .

Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 .

In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5. lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The movable decorative member 14, which is partially visible in FIG. 1, is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

The sub-control board 90 also has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second A production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the winning/losing determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. There are "jackpot" and "off" as a result of the special symbol suitability determination. In the case of a ``big hit'', a ``big hit pattern'' is stop-displayed in the special pattern display part 41, and in the case of a ``loss'', a ``losing pattern'' is stopped and displayed in the special pattern display part 41.例文帳に追加When it is determined as a big hit, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbols stopped and displayed. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "12R 2nd jackpot", "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot", There are a total of eight types of "15R 6th big win", "2R 7th big win" and "2R 8th big win". "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot" are jackpots in which the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big prize mouth (first big prize mouth 30 or second big prize mouth 35) is 15 times, and "12R th jackpot" 2 jackpots” and “12R 3rd jackpots” are jackpots in which the number of openings (number of rounds) of the jackpot (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) is 12, and “7R 4th jackpot”. And "7R 5th jackpot" is a jackpot in which the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big prize mouth (1st big prize mouth 30 or 2nd big prize mouth 35) is 7 times, "2R 7th big win" and "2R The 8th big win” is a big win in which the number of openings (the number of rounds) of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) is two. In each of these jackpots, in the first and second rounds, only the second big prize opening 35 (upper big prize opening) is opened while the first big prize opening 30 is closed. The first big prize winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) are opened in even-numbered rounds. In other words, after the third round, the first big prize opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) are alternately opened (large winning opening shown in FIG. 6). Please refer to the opening order column of the winning opening pattern). In addition, a predetermined interval time (closing time) is set between each round. The interval time between rounds is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), and the interval time between other rounds is set to 200 ms (0.2 seconds).

Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big winning game will be described. First, in odd-numbered rounds after the third round, the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened until 25000 ms (25 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the round, and is closed after 25000 ms (25 seconds) have elapsed, thereby ending the round. In other words, the first big winning hole 30 is opened with an opening pattern of 25000ms opening time and one opening. A game ball can be easily entered into the first big winning hole 30 opened in this opening pattern by hitting to the right. In the odd-numbered rounds, the second big winning hole 35 is kept closed (incapable of entering a ball, incapable of accepting game balls). On the other hand, in the third and subsequent even-numbered rounds, the second big prize-winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the round, and then closed for 1000 ms (1 second) between each opening. 1 time of 1000 ms (1 second), 1 time of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and 2 times of 1000 ms (1 second) are sequentially performed, and then the round is finished. That is, the opening pattern of the opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and the number of times of opening 5 times (second number) is used to open the second big winning hole 35 . In the second big winning hole 35 that opens in this opening pattern, it is possible to easily enter the game ball when it is opened for the first 16000ms (16 seconds) by hitting to the right, and when it is opened for other times. A ball may or may not enter. In the even-numbered rounds, the first big winning hole 30 is kept in a closed state (incapable of entering a ball, incapable of accepting game balls).

Also, in the second round, the second big winning hole 35 is opened, and the movable piece 150 is operated with the start of the opening (first opening start). Among the eight types of jackpots described above, "15R 1st jackpot", "15R 6th jackpot", "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" It is a big hit (hereinafter also referred to as "V-passing scheduled big hit") that opens the second big winning hole 35 in a manner that the game ball can easily (possibly) pass through the 39. On the other hand, for the "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the second big prize opening 35 is opened in such a manner that it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. It is a big hit to open (hereinafter also referred to as "V non-passing scheduled big hit"). Explaining the opening mode of the second big winning hole 35 and the operation mode of the movable piece 150 in the second round, in the "V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening and closing operation mode of the second big winning hole 35 in the second round (opening pattern ) is the same as in the third and subsequent even-numbered rounds. Then, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is started with the opening (first opening) when the second big winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has passed from the start of the round. Specifically, when 80 ms has passed since the first opening of the second big winning port 35 (that is, the start of the round), the operating state (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned ON) for 80 ms, and then the non-operating state (movable One solenoid 151 is turned OFF), and after 2840 ms (approximately 2.8 seconds) have passed, the operating state is again set (movable solenoid 151 is turned ON), and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) has passed. Maintain (see Figure 52). Therefore, in the "V-passing scheduled jackpot", the movable piece 150 is continuously activated after 3000 ms (3 seconds) from the start of the second round. During the latter 13000 ms (13 seconds), the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 can pass through the specific area 39 . Also, even after the 16000ms (16 seconds) opening is completed, there is a 1000ms (1 second) closing, one 1000ms (1 second) opening, one 4000ms (4 seconds) opening, and a 1000ms (1 second) opening. 1 second) are sequentially performed twice, so that the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 at the time of the opening can also pass through the specific area 39 . As a result, the "V passage scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot with a high possibility that the game state after the jackpot game ends will be a high probability state, which will be described later. In addition, in such an opening pattern, that is, an opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and an opening pattern (second opening operation) of 5 times (second number) of opening times (second opening operation), the second big winning opening 35 is hit rightward. , the game ball can be easily entered during the first 16000 ms (16 seconds) of opening, and may or may not enter during other openings.

On the other hand, in the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from the start of the second round, the movable piece 150 is controlled in the same manner as in the "V-passing scheduled jackpot", and the second big prize opening 35 is opened 100 ms from the start of the second round ( 0.1 seconds) (momentary opening and closing), and then closed to end the round (see FIG. 51). In other words, the second big winning hole 35 is opened in an opening pattern (third opening operation) with an opening time of 100 ms (third time) and an opening number of times (third number of times). Therefore, in the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the possibility of the game ball entering the second big prize hole 35 in the second round is extremely low (substantially impossible), and the game ball is placed in the specific area 39. The possibility of passing through is also extremely low (virtually impossible). As a result, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot with a low (no) possibility that the game state after the jackpot game ends will be a high probability state described later, in other words, it will be a normal state (low probability state) described later. It will likely be a big hit. Thus, in the present embodiment 1, it is determined whether or not the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the high probability state based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the second round of the big win game. It is called a "privilege decision game".

Also, in the first round, the second big winning hole 35 is opened, but the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 is changed according to the kind of big win. That is, in the first round of the "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot", the second big prize winning port 35 is opened a plurality of times, and the manner of opening and closing operations is the same as in the third round described above. The same is true for subsequent even-numbered rounds. Therefore, in the first round of the "15R 1st big win" and "15R 6th big win", the game ball can be easily entered into the second big winning hole 35 by hitting right. In addition, the first round of the "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" (V-passing planned jackpot) is the above-mentioned "V non-passing planned jackpot" (12R 3rd jackpot, 7R The second big prize opening 35 is opened in the same manner as in the second round of the fifth big win and the 2R eighth big win. That is, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 second) from the start of the round, and then closed to end the round. Therefore, in the first round of "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" (V passing scheduled jackpot), the opening time is 100ms (first time), and the number of times of opening is 1 time (first number of times), the second big winning hole 35 is opened in the opening pattern (first opening operation), and the possibility that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 is extremely low (substantially impossible). .

The first round of the "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" are the aforementioned "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot". The second big winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times in a mode in which the first round and the second round are connected (see FIG. 49). In other words, the opening pattern of the second big prize-winning port 35 in the first round of the "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", which are "V non-passing scheduled jackpots", is "V passing The first round opening pattern (first opening operation) and the second round opening pattern (second opening operation ) and an interval time (here, 2000 ms) between them. Specifically, after opening the second big prize opening 35 for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round (first opening operation), it is closed for 2000 ms, then opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds), and then for 1000 ms. One 1000 ms (1 second) open, one 4000 ms (4 second) open, and two 1000 ms (1 second) opens ( second opening operation), respectively. Therefore, the first round of the "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" are apparently "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot". It is the same as when the 1st and 2nd rounds of "jackpot" are performed (end of the 2nd round) (see FIG. 49). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the "V-passed big win" and the "V not-passed big win" (for example, "7R fourth big win" and "7R fifth big win") of the same number of rounds. In the first embodiment, the movable piece 150 (distribution member) for distributing whether or not to guide the game ball entering the second big prize hole 35 to the specific area 39 is operated only in the second round. and do not operate in other rounds. Therefore, when the number of rounds is "12", "7", or "2", the player pays attention to the opening and closing operation of the second big winning port 35 from the first round in the big winning game. Even so, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability state described later (whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39).

In addition, the distribution probability of each jackpot in the judgment of the first special pattern (special drawing 1) is 35% for the 15R first jackpot, 5% for the 12R second jackpot, 30% for the 12R third jackpot, and 7R fourth. The big hit is 10%, and the 7R fifth big hit is 20%, and when divided into the planned V-passed big hit and the V-not-passed planned big hit, the V-passed planned big hit is 50%, and the V-not-passed planned big hit is 50%. there is On the other hand, the distribution probability of each jackpot in the judgment of the second special pattern (special drawing 2) is 60% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 2R seventh jackpot, and 20% for the 2R eighth jackpot. Divided into V-passing scheduled jackpots and V-not-passing scheduled jackpots, V-passing scheduled jackpots account for 80% and V-not-passing scheduled jackpots account for 20%. That is, when a big hit is determined by the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, which has become easier to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, Compared with the case where the big hit is achieved by the judgment of the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20, the possibility of the 15R big win and the possibility of the V passage scheduled big win are also high. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played at the second start port 21 rather than becoming a big hit in the winning judgment (big hit lottery with the first special symbol) performed by the game ball entering the first start port 20. It is set so that the player will be more likely to win a big win in the win/loss determination (big win lottery of the second special symbol) performed after the ball enters the ball. That is, the player expects the ball to enter the second starting hole 21 and plays the game. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting hole 21 increases.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether or not the hit is a big hit is made based on a ``random number for judging the success or failure of a special symbol (also referred to as ``information for judging success or failure''). Judgment is performed based on "random number for determining jackpot type (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" and "information for symbol determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes "variation pattern random number (also referred to as “fluctuation pattern information”).

A fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Random numbers obtained based on passing through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery). Normally, the symbol random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combining the probability variation function for special symbols and normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening extension function in an operating state or a non-operating state. . For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is "normal state (also referred to as "low probability state"). ”. In the high-probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol propriety determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the success/failure determination is performed using the normal state jackpot determination table, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state with a large value of the special symbol hit/fail determination random number that is determined as the jackpot is used. is used to determine the suitability (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability that the variation display of the special symbols will result in a big win (a stopped symbol becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry ball (an entry ball that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) to the starting port is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in the time-saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in normal symbol propriety determination is higher than the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol per determination table used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol per determination table, the normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) (See FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variable display of the normal symbols will result in a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated. .

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of opening times of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is higher than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is in operation. Concretely, when the result of normal design propriety determination is hit in the non-time-saving state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.2 seconds once, and the second starting port is open during that period. Become. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol suitability determination is hit in the time saving state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable prize winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the circumstances where the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating As a result, the second starting port 21 is opened frequently, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

A high base state (high frequency state) may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, than when the function is not in operation It is sufficient if the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game state after the special game when any of the 15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot is achieved , If the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 during the special game, the special symbol high probability state, the special symbol time saving state and the high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed. In addition, if the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is not made, it becomes a normal state of special symbols, a time-saving state of special symbols, and a high base state.

Also, in the game state after the special game in the case of the 12R third big win and the 2R eighth big win, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. Along with the normal state of the special design, it becomes the time-saving state and high base state of the special design (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as "low certainty high base state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a "high probability high base state".

Further, in the game state after the special game when the 7R fifth big hit is achieved, since it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, the normal state of the special symbols is entered. It becomes a non-time-saving state and a low base state of the special pattern (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". In addition, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a "high probability high base state".

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, when the game state becomes "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R second jackpot, and the game state becomes "low probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R third jackpot. In both cases, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation function is operating after the special game (jackpot game) is over, that is, whether it is in a high-probability state or a normal state (low-probability state). I'm trying to be. Such a state in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a high-probability state or a normal state (low-probability state) is called a "probability non-announcement state". Similarly, when the game state becomes "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R 7th jackpot, and when the game state becomes "low probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R 8th jackpot , the state after the end of the special game (big hit game) is referred to as "probability non-reported state". In this "probability non-announcement state", it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is a high probability state through the appearance (appearance) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the performance performed according to the progress of the game (substantially impossible). This "probability non-notification state" can be generated, for example, until the special symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), which is the termination condition of the "low probability high base state". On the other hand, when the game state becomes a "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of any one of the 15R 1st jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot, this high probability high base state has a high probability. It becomes a state in which it is clear to the player that it is in a state, and it becomes a so-called "variable probability game state" for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, it is possible to set three game states of "low-probability-low base state", "low-probability-high base state", and "high-probability-high base state" as game states. , In addition to this, it may be possible to set a high probability state of special symbols, a non-time saving state and a low base state of special symbols, that is, a "high probability low base state".

In a high-base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, the game can be advantageously progressed by making the game ball enter the right game area 3B by hitting to the right. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. It is because Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol propriety determination) rather than hitting left. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to inform that the ball should be shot to the right game area.

On the other hand, in a low base state (for example, a low probability low base state), the game can be progressed more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A by striking to the left. In the low base state, the second start port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first start port 20 than into the second start port 21. because Therefore, the player hits left to enter the game ball into the first starting hole 20. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol propriety determination) than hitting to the right. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area.

Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, status and counter resets. etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal design is "General", the special design is "Special", the first special design is "Special 1", "1st Special", and the second special design is "Special 2". It is sometimes called the "Second Special Plan".

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed, for example, based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, second big winning hole sensor 35a, general ball entrance sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read and stored in the output buffer of RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 62 is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts).

Following the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described starting opening sensor detection process (S204), normal picture operation process (S205), special figure operation process (S206), specific area sensor detection process (S207) , start-up ball processing (S208), and power-off monitoring processing (S209) are executed. Thereafter, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) ends. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10). ), and the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal pattern reserved balls (the number of normal pattern reservations, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not it is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal design reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the normal number of reserved design balls (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal design reservation balls out of the normal design reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but when the game ball enters the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of pending balls (the number of second special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special pending provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S306). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), proceed to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S307).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S308) it does. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the jackpot type determination random number Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random number value shown in FIG. information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special-figure 2-holding balls out of the second special-figure holding storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S309). ). When the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is finished, but when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure reservations, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S310). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is finished, but if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S311).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S312) it does. In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S312), like the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 7 (A) numerical value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls out of the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). In the general pattern operation process (S205), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and if "0" (YES in S501) Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol propriety determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S502). Also, following the normal design propriety determination process (S502), the normal design variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 30 seconds is selected. Also, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504), which will be described later, is performed. Also, following the normal design random number shift process (S504), the normal design fluctuation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503 is used to start the normal symbol variation display, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation start.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the game state is the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state out of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (hit determination value "0" ~ "239") based on the high probability normal pattern right or wrong determination, it is determined whether or not hit (S604), the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, the time saving flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state out of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) ( Based on the hit determination value "0", "1"), it is determined whether or not there is a hit by the low-probability normal pattern success/failure determination (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) determines whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
After the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal design fluctuation time has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the general pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal design with the display result (hit normal design or losing normal design) according to the judgment result of the random number for normal design propriety determination (S804), this processing finish.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether it is in the time saving state (S902). And if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern in the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port open counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-saving state (NO in S902), the open pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, an open pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port open counter. Then, following the setting of the open pattern (S903, S906), the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Normal figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the normal pattern per end process to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the normal pattern per end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the normal pattern per end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so per normal pattern The end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern per flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure action processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure operation processing (S206) following normal figure operation processing (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processing related to the special symbol indicator 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101 NO in S1103, YES in S1103), perform special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special figure operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol confirmed Processing (S1106) is performed, and when "special figure operation status" is "4" (both NO in S1101, S1103, S1105), special electric accessary processing (S1107) as a jackpot game is performed. It should be noted that the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second starting port 21 is "0" (S1201). . If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 20 (that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the entry into the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the process of setting the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as a standby screen (executing a demo screen for customer waiting) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process ends, Otherwise (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second start port 21 , Toku-zu 2 propriety determination processing (S1202), Toku-zu 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), Toku-zu 2 random number shift processing (S1204), Toku-zu 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment 1, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the second special figure reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). And in the present embodiment 1, the winning judgment based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a big hit with a large profit for the player than the winning judgment based on the first special figure reservation (Fig. 8 (B )).

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first of the second special figure reservation The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (the oldest memory) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (jackpot determination values are "3" and " 397”), a decision is made (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), a win or failure judgment is performed based on the big hit judgment table for high probability state among the big hit judgment tables (FIG. 8A) (S1304). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", and "449". , "503".

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1304) is determined to be a "jackpot" (YES in S1305), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) is read and shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1307), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned on (S1309), and the process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is not "big hit" (NO in S1305), the winning pattern is determined (S1306), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Here, the big hit judgment (special symbol success or failure judgment) and the big hit type determination judgment may be called "judgment", respectively, and even if it is called "judgment" including which big hit pattern is determined by judging the big hit. good. These results may also be called "determination results".

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of four LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 7R lamp, a 12R lamp, and a 15R lamp. Then, for example, when the 2R seventh big win or the 2R eighth big win occurs, the 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big win symbols are displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R▴7RΔ12RΔ15RΔ" (for example, ▴: lit, Δ: extinguished). Further, when the 7R fourth big win or the 7R fifth big win is achieved, the lamp for 7R is lighted and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big win pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2RΔ7R▲12RΔ15RΔ". Further, when the 12R second big win or the 12R third big win is achieved, the lamp for 12R is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big win pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2RΔ7RΔ12R▲15RΔ". Further, when the 15R first big win or the 15R fourth big win is achieved, the lamp for 15R is lighted and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big win pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2RΔ7RΔ12RΔ15R▴".

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) next to the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). In S1401, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1402). In S1402, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), refer to the non-time saving state jackpot table (part corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Next, the process proceeds to S1404.

On the other hand, in S1402, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of pending second special symbols is either "1" or "2" (S1405). The number of reservations here is the number of memories including the information that determines the variation pattern by this process, so the number of reservations is any value of "1 to 4". Then, in S1405, if it is determined that the number of reservations is either "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the first reservation number deviation table (non-time saving state out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 And the part corresponding to the number of held balls "1, 2" that is out of play) is referred to, and a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1406). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1405 that the number of reservations is neither "1" or "2", that is, that it is either "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the second reservation number deviation table (Part corresponding to non-time-saving state and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of retained balls "3, 4"), variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) variation based on Select a pattern (S1407). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. In addition, the first retention number deviation table is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time period than the second retention number deviation table. Also, the shortest selectable fluctuation time (12000 ms) is set to be longer than that of the table for the second pending number deviation (4000 ms).

Also, in S1401, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (S1408). In S1408, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1408), with reference to the time saving state jackpot table (part corresponding to the time saving state and jackpot of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined at S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO at S1408), it is then determined whether or not the pending number is "1" (S1410). The number of reservations referred to here is also the same as described above, and the number of reservations is any value from "1" to "4". In S1410, when it is determined that the number of reservations is "1" (YES in S1410), the table for the third reservation number out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. applicable part) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P15 to P18 is selected. Also, in S1410, if it is determined that the number of reservations is not "1", that is, the number of reservations is any of "2 to 4" (NO in S1410), the fourth reservation number deviation table (shown in FIG. 9 Select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the part corresponding to the time saving state and off and the number of held balls "2 to 4" in the variation pattern table (S1411 ). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the variation pattern selected in the time-saving state and out of time is more likely to select a short variation pattern than the variation pattern selected in the non-time-saving state and out of time. there is This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation (promptly advance the game during the time saving) by making it possible to select more variation patterns with a short variation time in the time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and the processing ends. In other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern to the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Also, the variation pattern designation command set in this process is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-controller 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003" , address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1503) and this process ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" and the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) , Special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1207), Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), Special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), Special figure 1 variation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1601, in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) The random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for judging whether or not the special symbol is stored is read out and processed.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored) RAM corresponding to the fourth one of the first special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1803) and this process ends.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the special symbol variation time (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has passed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" ( S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the variable probability counter is "0", the variable probability flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the variable probability counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

And in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving to count the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state Decrease the value of the counter by 1 (S1908), determine whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1909), if it is "0" (YES in S1909), turn off the time saving flag (S1910), Proceed to the processing of S1911. Also, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination results of the special symbol propriety determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is finished.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R sixth jackpot) (S2002). In S2002, when it is determined that the type of jackpot is the 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to "15" (S2003), and in S2009. Go to processing.

If it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not the 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), then it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot is the 12R jackpot (12R second jackpot or 12R third jackpot) (S2004). In S2004, when it is determined that the 12R big hit (YES in S2004), "12" is set to the value of the round counter (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the jackpot type is not the 12R jackpot (NO in S2004), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the 7R jackpot (7R fourth jackpot or 7R fifth jackpot) (S2006). At S2006, when it is determined that the 7R big hit (YES at S2006), the value of the round counter is set to "7" (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2009. If it is determined in S2006 that it is not a 7R jackpot (NO in S2006), the jackpot type is a 2R jackpot (2R seventh jackpot or 2R eighth jackpot), so the value of the round counter is set to "2" (S2008). , the process proceeds to S2009.

In S2009, a large winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the type of big hit is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. Here, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined according to the type of the big win (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening is fixed in a specific round. Specifically, in any jackpot, the second big prize opening 35 is opened and closed in the first and second rounds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened and closed in the third round (if the jackpot is three or more rounds). It is assumed that On the other hand, in different jackpots, although the same second big winning hole 35 is opened and closed in the first round, the opening/closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined for each type of big win. Specifically, if the 15R first jackpot is won, the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is set, and the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is executed during execution of the 15R first jackpot game. . In addition, if the 12R second big win, the release pattern for the 12R second big win is set, if the 12R third big win, the open pattern for the 12R third big win is set, and if the 7R fourth big win, the 7R fourth big win is set. The release pattern for the big win is set, if the 7R 5th big win, the release pattern for the 7R 5th big win is set, if the 15R 6th big win, the release pattern for the 15R 6th big win is set, and the 2R 7th big win is set. If it is a big win, the opening pattern for the 2R 7th big win is set, and if it is the 2R 8th big win, the opening pattern for the 2R 8th big win is set. Then, the corresponding big-hit release pattern is executed in each big-hit game.

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). The opening command is determined according to the type of the big win, and is provided corresponding to each big win, such as an opening command for the 15R first big win, an opening command for the 12R second big win, and the like. The set opening command then causes the corresponding opening period to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, in the case of the 7R 4th jackpot or the 7R 5th jackpot, a period of 1900 ms is set as the opening period, and in the case of other jackpots, a period of 8000 ms is set as the opening period. is set. Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub-control unit 90 receives the opening command, during the opening period. A corresponding predetermined game effect is performed. Also, in S2011, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012). Also, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON in S2001 (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory processing (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103). In S2103, when it determines with a time saving flag being ON (it is YES at S2103), a time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and it transfers to the process of S2105. If it is determined as NO in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability variation flag, and if it is determined as NO in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the present embodiment 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low base state during execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening processing of all the jackpot devices (the first jackpot device 31 and the second jackpot device 36) in the jackpot game has ended (the jackpot game has ended). If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the round (S2106). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big winning type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round after the opening period has ended. Also, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) has ended. In addition, the round may be simply referred to as "R" and may also be referred to as "round game".

At S2106, when it is determined that it is time to start the round (YES at S2106), the round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the big winning opening opening process is performed (S2108). As a result, the big winning hole is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output processing of S201. Also, in the big winning hole opening process of S2108, the opening pattern which is the big winning hole opening pattern determined according to the type of the big win to be executed and which is determined for the round to be started is started.

Next, in S2109, whether or not the round to be started is the V round (second round), that is, the starting is to open the second big winning hole 35 (also referred to as "V attacker") having a specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether or not it is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (to make the specific area 39 passable for a game ball) (S2109). In this embodiment, the second round is set to the V round in which the movable piece 150 is operated. In addition, a round (V round) in which the second big winning port 35 having the specific area 39 inside is opened and the movable piece 150 is operated (V round) is also referred to as a "specific round" or a "specific round game". The "specific round" or "specific round game" in the jackpot game related to the scheduled passing jackpot is also called "first specific round" or "first specific round game", and the "specific round" in the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ” or “specific round game” is also referred to as “second specific round” or “second specific round game”. In addition, a round in which the second big winning port 35 having a specific area 39 is opened and the round in which the movable piece 150 is not operated is also called a "non-specific round" or a "non-specific round game" and is scheduled to pass through V. The "non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" in the big hit game is also called "first non-specific round" or "first non-specific round game". "Non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" is also referred to as "second non-specific round" or "second non-specific round game". Further, the round in which the first big winning opening 30, which does not have a specific area or a movable piece inside, is opened is also referred to as a "normal round" or a "normal round game".

If it is determined in S2109 that the round to be started is not the V round (second round), that is, the first round or the third round or later (NO in S2109), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2109 that the round to be started is the V round (second round) (YES in S2109), the effective period of the specific area is set based on the predetermined specific area effective pattern (S2110). At the same time, the specific area opening/closing operation is started based on a predetermined specific area opening/closing operation pattern (S2111), and the process is finished.

Here, the specific area effective pattern is as shown in the timing chart of "Treatment of Specific Area Passage" in the timing chart of FIG. The specific area opening/closing operation pattern is also shown in the timing chart of "specific area" in the timing chart of FIG. 39) or closed (a state in which it is impossible to pass through the specific area 39).

The specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts when the V-round starts (when it is first opened), and ends when the V-round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) set after the V-round ends. (see Figures 50-52). In addition, although the details will be described later, only one specific area opening/closing operation pattern is set in this embodiment, starting with a closing period of 80 ms, then setting an opening period of 80 ms, and thereafter following a predetermined pattern. An open period or closed period is set. Also, although only one specific area opening/closing operation pattern is set, the end timing of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern differs depending on the jackpot game (executed V round). It becomes a specific area opening/closing operation pattern. Specifically, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 51 and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 52 are different.

If it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Here, examples of cases where it is determined that it is not the time to start the round include, for example, during the opening period before the start of the first round, during the round, during the interval period after the end of the round, and during the closing process of the big winning opening, which will be described later. be able to. At S2112, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening is being performed, that is, whether or not the predetermined opening pattern started at S2108 is being executed (during the round) (S2112). In S2112, when it is determined that the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening is being executed (during the round) (YES in S2112), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the round being executed is met (S2113).

Here, as the round end conditions of the present embodiment, (1) the round execution time (for example, 29 s) set for the round being executed has passed (or the opening pattern set for the round being executed has ended (2) In the round being executed, two conditions are defined: that a specified number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls have entered the round being executed. Then, when one of the conditions is met, the round end condition is met based on the previously met condition. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is not met (NO in S2113), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process proceeds to S2115. In addition, in S2114, a round end command that can specify the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" if the 1st round is ended, and "2R end command" if the 2nd round is ended. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output process of S201.

Also, if it is determined in S2112 that the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening is not in progress (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2115. In S2115, a large winning opening closing process, which will be described later, is performed (S2115), and then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening closing process has ended (S2116). Here, in the big winning opening closing process, mainly, the interval period setting process, the match determination process of the number of input/output in the chance round (first round and second round), and the retry process when it is determined that there is no match, error Notification processing and the like are executed, and when these processing are completed, it is determined that the big winning opening closing processing has been completed. In addition, the closing process flag is turned ON during execution of the big winning opening closing process, and when the big winning opening closing process ends (completes), the closing process flag is turned OFF. Therefore, whether or not the big winning opening closing process has ended is determined by whether the closing process flag is ON or OFF. Here, each of the interval period setting process, the input/ejection number match determination process, the retry process, and the error notification process that can be executed in the big winning opening closing process is also referred to as "confirmation process". is generally called confirmation processing.

If it is determined in S2116 that the big winning opening closing process has not ended (the closing process flag is ON) (NO in S2116), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2116 that the closing processing of the big winning opening has ended (the closing processing flag is OFF) (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and the value of the round counter becomes "0". ” (S2118). If it is determined in S2118 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2119), and a jackpot ending period is started. Then (S2120), the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2121), and the process ends. It should be noted that the value of the round counter becomes "0" when all the rounds of the big hit to be executed are completed.

Here, in the jackpot end processing in S2119, the processing of setting the ending command is performed, and the ending command to be set is, from a plurality of ending commands, the game state when the jackpot is won, the type information of the jackpot, and One of the ending commands is selected and set based on specific area non-passage (specific area non-passage) information (whether the V flag is ON or OFF). The ending period to be executed (set) differs depending on which ending command is set. Here, the ending period is after all the opening operations of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the jackpot game are completed, and the special symbols (effect symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. is a period set before the execution of the , and is also referred to as an "end period". During this ending period (end period), the big winning opening is closed. In addition, the opening period is a period set before the start of the first opening operation of the big winning opening in the jackpot game and after the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is disabled. ” is also called. Also, the effect executed during the "start period" is also called "start effect (opening effect)".

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 65, in the case where the gaming state is low probability time saving (low probability low base state), as a result of special symbol propriety determination, the jackpot type is 15R first jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot Or, if the 15R sixth jackpot and the V flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot game is in a high probability state (high probability high base state), the ending period of 17000 ms (first ending period ) to set the ending command. On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination, the jackpot type is the 15R first jackpot, the 7R fourth jackpot, or the 15R sixth jackpot, and if the V flag is OFF, that is, after the jackpot game is a time-saving state (low In the case of a high base state), an ending command for executing an ending period (second ending period) of 8000 ms is set.

This is, as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination, if the jackpot type is the 15R first jackpot, the 7R fourth jackpot, or the 15R sixth jackpot, when passing through the specific area, in the ending period, after the jackpot game, a high probability state (probability variable mode) Effect (first specific effect) that indicates to the player that it will shift to is executed, and in the case of not passing through the specific area (passing through the non-specific area), in the ending period, transitioning to the time saving state (time saving mode) (indicate to the player that it will be in a low probability state, or not to indicate to the player that it will be in a high probability state) effect (second specific effect) is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect that indicates to the player that the transition to the high probability state is performed is a relatively long-time effect, indicating to the player that the transition to the time saving state (high probability state is (not shown to the player) The second specific effect is a relatively short-time effect. As described above, in this embodiment, it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths depending on the result of passing the specific area in the V round (whether the V flag is ON or OFF). Ending periods of different lengths can be set. Thereby, the sub-control part which received the ending command can execute the ending effect of different effect mode and effect period according to the ending period (according to the game state after the big hit game). Here, in the V round (in the jackpot game), the information indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area is also referred to as "specific area information". This specific area information has information indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area in the V round and information indicating that the game ball did not pass through the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) can determine the ending period based on this specific area information.

In addition, when the game state is low-probability time-saving none (low-probability low base state), if the jackpot type is the 12R second jackpot or the 12R third jackpot, even if the V flag is ON or OFF , an ending command for executing a common ending period (third ending period) of 8000 ms. As a result of the special symbol suitability determination, if the jackpot type is the 12R second jackpot or the 12R third jackpot, in either case, the effect mode (production mode) after the end of the jackpot game is changed to the special symbol suitability determination. This is due to a probability non-announcement state (simply referred to as "non-announcement mode") in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability (jackpot probability) is high or low. That is, in the ending effect executed during the ending period related to these big hits, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not, the effect (third specific effect) “indicating entering the non-notification mode” is performed. The ending period to be set is not changed depending on the region passing result. Here, in this embodiment, the second ending period and the third ending period have the same length, but instead, the first ending period and the third ending period have the same length. You may Here, the non-reporting mode means that the player is not notified of the probability of the success/failure determination (making it difficult to recognize), so that the probability may be high or low, that is, there is a possibility of a high probability. It is a production that shows that. Here, as a result of the special symbol suitability determination, the third specific effect executed in the ending period when the jackpot types are the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot is also called "first non-notification mode shift effect". This differs from the sixth specific effect (second non-notification mode transition effect) and the seventh specific effect (third non-notification mode transition effect), which will be described later, in the effect mode and effect period. These are assumed to have different high probability (expectations), and the high probability expectations in this embodiment are: second non-notification mode transition effect > first non-notification mode transition effect > third non-notification mode transition effect It is in the order of the notification mode transition effect.

In addition, if the game state does not have a low probability of time saving (low probability low base state), if the jackpot type is 7R 5th jackpot, and if the game state has a low probability of time saving (low probability high base state) or high probability time saving In the case of yes (high probability high base state), regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (whether the specific area is passed or not), the common ending period of 5000 ms (4th ending period) is to be set. This is because, in the case of the 7R fifth big win, the performance mode (performance mode) after the end of the big win game is set to the "normal mode" which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to this big hit, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not, the effect of "shifting to normal mode" (fourth specific effect) is performed. The ending period to be set shall not be changed. "Normal mode" is in principle a production mode indicating a low-probability base state. It may be in the base state. However, since the 7R fifth jackpot is a "planned jackpot that does not pass through the specific area", it is very difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game. Also, the fourth ending period is shorter than the first to third ending periods. Since the low-probability-low-base state is the most disadvantageous game state among the game states set after the big win game, providing a long period of time to notify the transition to such a game state may reduce the player's willingness to play. may decrease. In particular, if such a result (7R 5th jackpot) occurs in a high-probability-low base state or a low-probability-low base state, the tendency is remarkable because the advantageous state shifts to a disadvantageous state (normal state). is. For this reason, a short ending period is set so that the game progresses quickly.

In addition, in the case where the game state is low probability time saving (low probability high base state) or high probability time saving (high probability high base state), the ending period (8000 ms, 6000 ms, 3900 ms) are defined (see FIG. 48), and the ending command (ending period to be executed) set does not change depending on the specific area passing information (V flag ON/OFF). Specifically, in the high base state, in the case of the 15R 6th jackpot, in the ending period, "indicating that the high probability state (variable probability mode) continues" effect (5th specific effect), so the ending period of 8000ms (Fifth ending period). The reason why the 17000 ms is not set is that the big hit in the high base state is the second and subsequent big hits (during the so-called continuous game), so it is necessary to set the (shorter) time setting. In addition, in the high base state, when the 2R seventh jackpot is achieved, the effect mode after the jackpot game ends is set to the "non-notification mode". And in the ending period, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not, the effect "indicating entering into the non-notification mode" (sixth specific effect, second non-notification mode transition effect) is performed, so the ending period of 6000ms (Sixth ending period) is set. Further, in the high base state, when the 2R eighth big win is achieved, the effect mode after the end of the big win game is set to "non-notification mode". And in the ending period, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not, in order to perform an effect (seventh specific effect, third non-notify mode transition effect) that "indicates entering the non-notification mode", the ending period of 3900 ms (seventh ending period) is set.

In addition, since the 2R seventh jackpot is a "V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game is a high-probability state as long as the game is played in a normal manner (according to instructions). Since the eighth jackpot is set to be a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game is a time-saving state. Therefore, in the ending period, when the second non-informative mode transition effect is executed, the player plays the game with a high expectation for a higher probability than when the third non-informative mode transition effect is executed. becomes possible. In addition, in the high base state, if any of the 15R first jackpot, 12R second jackpot, 12R third jackpot, or 7R fourth jackpot is achieved, it is the same as the above-mentioned case of the 15R sixth jackpot in the high base state. Since the same ending period is set, the explanation is omitted. In addition, when there is no low-probability time-saving (low-probability low base state), if the 2R 7th jackpot occurs, the ending period is set to the same as when the 2R 7th jackpot occurs in the above-described high base state. is omitted. In addition, when there is no low-probability time-saving (low-probability low base state), if the 2R 8th jackpot is reached, the ending period is set to be the same as when the 2R 8th jackpot is hit in the above-described high base state. is omitted. In addition, the 2R eighth jackpot is defined as a ``V non-passage scheduled jackpot (also referred to as ``V non-passage schedule jackpot''), and the high-probability state is terminated with this jackpot as a trigger. Therefore, as described above, the shortest period (3900 ms) is set because it is preferable that the period for notifying entry into such a disadvantageous period is short. One of the reasons why the ending period is not changed based on the specific area information during the time saving is as follows. That is, since the jackpot during the time saving is the jackpot after the second time (so-called Renso), the player gets used to the game, and the game progresses as planned for "V planned big hit" or "V non-passed big hit". Since the possibility is very high, the ending period may not be changed based on the specific area information.

Also, in S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round in the jackpot game has ended, it is determined whether the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has passed ( S2122), if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and the later-described game state setting process (S2124) is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (FIG. 20).

Here, in the specific area effective period setting process (S2110), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled ( (also referred to as "effective period" or "first period"). A period other than the valid period is set as a period (also referred to as "invalid period" or "second period") in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid (non-granting of privilege). In addition, the effective period of the specific area 39 depends on the execution mode of the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round and the opening pattern of the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) ( (opening/closing operation pattern of the movable piece).

Specifically, the period during which passage through the specific area is valid, that is, the period in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is in a high probability state (the period during which benefits are granted) by passing the game ball through the specific area , as shown in FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the second round of the 2R 8th big win, the 7R 5th big win, and the 12R 3rd big win, that is, the V round (opening the second big winning hole 35). The 2R 8th jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot, and 12R 3rd jackpot are “V non-passing scheduled jackpots” in which the game ball is not scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Therefore, an opening pattern of short opening (second opening pattern) with a short opening time is selected as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the V round (opening pattern of V attacker).

Along with this, the specific area open/close pattern is executed, and the specific area effective period setting process is executed. First, when the V-attacker opens, the V-round (second round) starts, and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts. As shown in FIG. 51, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts from the closed state. After 80 ms has passed in the closed state, it changes to the open state (the movable piece 150 operates and changes from (a) to (b) in FIG. 47), and after 80 ms has passed in the open state (after 160 ms has passed in total). to the closed state. On the other hand, this open pattern of short opening closes the V attacker only after opening for 100 ms, ending the V round (second round). Then, an interval period of 2000 ms is set. The specific area opening/closing operation pattern is terminated at the end of the interval period (2000 ms) of this V-round. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is completed after the opening for 80 ms and the closing state for 1940 ms. As a result, the specified area opening/closing operation pattern is terminated without executing the subsequent opening operation for a maximum of 26000 ms (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, the validity period of the specific area starts after the start of the V-round and at the timing when the specific area becomes open for the first time. That is, 80 ms of the closed state after the start of the V-round and before the specific area becomes the open state (before the movable piece starts to operate) is an invalid period. Thereafter, during execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern, the period during which the specific area is in the open state is set to the effective period. However, the retry operation is regarded as an invalid period. In addition to this, when the specific area switches from the open state to the closed state, the period of 900 ms (this period is also referred to as “extra period”) after switching to the closed state remains valid. This is because when the movable piece 150 is closed, it enters the specific area 39 just before the specific area 39 is closed, and the entering game ball is actually detected by the specific area sensor 39a only when the specific area sensor 39a detects the game ball. This is because there is a possibility that it will be after the region is closed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when switching from the open state to the closed state, even if the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is being executed or after the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is being executed, an extra period of time after switching to the closed state is provided. period. In FIG. 51, after the valid period (extra period) of 900 ms has passed, there is no period in which the specific area is in the open state (except for the period during which the retry operation is executed), so the invalid period is continued thereafter.

Next, using FIG. 52, the second round of the 15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the V round (second big prize opening 35 ) will be used to explain the specific area effective period setting process. The 15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot are “V passage” in which the game ball is scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It is said to be a big hit. Therefore, an opening pattern of long opening (first opening pattern) with a long opening time is selected as an opening pattern (opening pattern of V-attacker) of the big winning opening in the V round.

Along with this, the specific area open/close pattern is executed, and the specific area effective period setting process is executed. As described above, the V-round (second round) starts when the V-attacker (the second big prize-winning hole 35) is opened, and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts. Unlike the short opening, the long opening pattern shown in FIG. 52 opens the V-attacker for 16000 ms to bring it into a closed state. Then, all the open patterns of long opening set in the V round (second round) such as the 15R first big hit mentioned above are executed, or the rules set for the V round (second round) in the V round The V round (2 rounds) is terminated when either a number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls enter or the termination condition is met. On the other hand, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is 2 as long as the specified number of game balls do not enter during 840 ms after the first open state (80 ms) (that is, 1000 ms after the start of the jackpot game). The open state for the first time (maximum 26000 ms) is executed. Incidentally, since the shooting speed of the game ball is about 1 ball per 600 ms, it is practically impossible to hit 10 game balls in 1000 ms.

As a result, in the specific area effective period setting process, after the initial open state (80 ms) of the specific area 39 is completed, the effective period is maintained for 900 ms as an extra period, and then disabled. After 1940 ms of the invalid state, the valid period is set in accordance with the second open state of the specific area 39 . Then, as shown in FIG. 52, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern ends when the V round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) related to the V round ends. Since the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is closed at the same time as the end, in the specific area effective period setting process, an extra period of 900 ms is set as the effective period after entering the closed state, and then the period is switched to the invalid period. .

Here, at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON (that is, the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the valid period), the game state display 46 is displayed in a predetermined manner. In this mode, it is notified that the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability state. Specifically, the gaming state display 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (eg, □: off, ▪: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of "a1, a2, a3," is set. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is set to "a1□a2□a3□". In addition, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the jackpot game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode remains "a1□a2□a3□". , the display mode may be "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

That is, in the later-described specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36), the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned ON outside the V valid period (V invalid period), the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 35) described later). By doing so, the V flag is prevented from being turned ON based on V passing by fraudulent act, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to a high probability state.

[Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the big winning opening closing process (also referred to as "confirmation process") will be described. The big winning opening closing process (S2115) is a process performed at the end of each round in the special electric accessory process (jackpot game). In the big winning opening closing process (S2115), it is first determined whether the closing process flag is ON (S2701), and if it is determined that the closing process flag is not ON (NO in S2701), the closing process flag is turned ON (S2702). , the interval period is started (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. As a result, the closing process flag indicating that the closing process is being executed is turned ON, and measurement of the interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) set after the round is started. Also, the interval period is set according to the round to end.

Specifically, if the round to end is the first round or the second round, the interval period is set to 2000 ms, and if the round to end is the third round or later, the interval period is set to 200 ms. In addition, when the big winning opening closing process ends, the closing process flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the closing process flag is ON in S2701, that is, if it is determined that the big winning opening closing process is being executed (YES in S2701), the process proceeds directly to S2704.

In S2704, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (S2704), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is being measured (NO in S2704), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S2704), then it is determined whether or not the first round has ended (S2705). If it is determined that the first round has been completed (YES in S2705), the input/discharge number matching determination process, which will be described later, is executed (S2708), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2705 that the first round has not ended (NO in S2705), then it is determined whether the second round, that is, the V round has ended (S2706). If it is determined in S2706 that the second round has ended (YES in S2706), the specific area opening/closing operation is ended (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2708.

As a result, the opening/closing operation of the specific region 39 (opening/closing operation of the movable piece 150) in the V-round ends. In other words, the specific area opening/closing operation that starts with the start of the V round ends when the interval period related to the V round after the end of the V round ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2706 that the second round has not ended, that is, the third round and subsequent rounds have ended (NO in S2706), the closing processing flag is turned OFF (S2709), and the processing is started. Finish. That is, from the third round onwards, as long as the interval period (200 ms) set after the end of the round ends, the closing processing flag is turned OFF, and the big winning opening closing processing ends. That is, in the big winning opening closing process of the third and subsequent rounds, the entering/ejecting number matching determination process and the specific area opening/closing operation ending process are not executed.

At S2708, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls entering the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) during the round matches the number of the game balls discharged from the big winning hole. The input/discharge number match determination process to be determined is performed (S2708), and the process ends. In addition, this input/emission number match determination process (S2708) is a round executed before the V round, and is a round (non-specific round ), and the second round, which is the V round (specific round). is not done. In the V-round, since the movable piece for opening and closing the specific area 39 in the V-attacker is operated, there is a possibility that the game ball may be caught in the movable piece and the game ball may be stuck in the attacker. Therefore, the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls are controlled to check whether there is clogging. In addition, when passing through a specific area due to a fraudulent act such as a so-called fishing line goto, the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls do not match, so the fraudulent act is discovered and unexpected damage is prevented. is also possible.

Also, the reason why the input/discharge number matching determination process is executed in the first round is to confirm whether or not there is a ball clogging before executing the V round which is executed first in the big win game. If the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls match at the end of the first round, it is possible to start the second V-round after confirming that there is no jamming. Also, if the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls do not match at the end of one round, by performing retry processing (also referred to as "movable member operation processing") and error notification, which will be described later, before the start of the V round It is also possible to eliminate ball clogging. In this way, the V round can be executed normally by performing the input/discharge number matching determination process in the first round and the second round. In addition, in the rounds after the V round executed last in the jackpot game, that is, in the rounds after the third round (after the end of the V round), the input/discharge number match determination process is not performed, and the interval period is also set to a short period (200 ms), and it becomes possible to quickly execute a big win game.

[Incoming/ejecting number match determination process]
Next, the input/discharge number match determination process (S2708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the input/emission number match determination process (S2708), first, in a predetermined round, the number of game balls that entered the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) (number of entering balls) and the number of gaming balls that were discharged ( number of discharges) matches (S2801). This input/ejection number match determination process (also referred to as "match determination process") is performed only in the big winning opening closing process of the first and second rounds. In both the first round and the second round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening pattern. Therefore, during the corresponding round (1st round or 2nd round), the number of balls entered into the second big prize hole 35 and the number of balls ejected from the second big prize hole 35 (second big prize winning device 36) are different. It determines whether or not they match.

FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the second big winning device 36. As shown in FIG. All the game balls entering the second big winning hole 35 pass through a predetermined game ball guidance passage in the second big winning device, (also called "detection sensor"). That is, the second big winning hole sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 35, and the second big winning hole sensor 35a detects the second big winning hole. It becomes possible to count the number of balls entering the mouth 35 . When a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the number of entered balls is counted and stored by means for counting the number of entered balls (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control section 80. FIG.

In addition, the game ball detected by (passed through) the second big winning hole sensor 35a then passes through a predetermined game ball guide path, and is always detected by either the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. pass through. That is, the specific area sensor 39a (also called "second discharge detection means" or "second discharge detection sensor") and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a (also called "first discharge detection means" or "first discharge detection sensor") ) is a sensor for detecting the discharge of game balls from the second big winning hole 35, and is discharged from the second big winning hole 35 based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. It becomes possible to count the number. When game balls are detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the number of discharges is counted and stored by discharge number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. FIG. In addition, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a for detecting the discharge of the game ball that entered the second big prize hole are also collectively referred to as "discharge detection means" or "discharge detection sensor".

In this embodiment, the entering ball number counting means and the discharged ball number counting means are provided, and the number of entering balls and the number of discharged balls are counted separately, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. A mode may be adopted in which a means for counting the number of incoming and outgoing balls is provided, and the count value is increased or decreased each time a ball is entered or discharged. In such a mode, the initial value is set to "0", and if the count value is "1", it indicates that the number of incoming balls is 1 more than the number of discharged balls, and if it is "-1", the number of discharged balls is greater than the number of discharged balls. It indicates that the number is one more than the number, and in the case of "0", it is possible to assume that the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls are the same.

Also, a movable piece 150 (also referred to as a "movable member") is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and when the movable piece 150 is in a closed state, the second big winning hole sensor 35a is activated. The passing game ball is guided to the non-specific area side, passes through the non-specific area sensor 49a, and is discharged out of the second big winning device (see FIG. 47(a)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 150 is in the open state, the game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 35a is guided toward the specific area, passes through the specific area sensor 39a, and exits the second big winning device. It will be discharged (see FIG. 47(b)).

Then, in S2801, the count value of the above-mentioned number-of-balls counting means and the count value of the number-of-emissions counting means are compared. match. Next, when it is determined in S2802 that the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls match (YES in S2802), it is determined whether or not error notification is being executed (S2803). If it is determined in S2803 that the error notification is not being executed (NO in S2803), the closing process flag is turned OFF (S2804), and the process ends. In other words, if the number of entries and exits matches and the error notification is not being executed, the big winning opening closing process for the corresponding round is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error notification is being executed (YES in S2803), the error notification is terminated (S2805), the closing processing flag is turned OFF (S2804), and the processing is finished. This is done by performing match determination again during the execution of the error notification (S2809), which will be described later, and if it is determined that they match, the error notification being executed is terminated halfway and then the closing processing flag is turned OFF. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the error notification from being continued for a long period of time even though the abnormality has been resolved.

If it is determined in S2802 that the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls do not match (NO in S2802), then it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a retry operation (S2806). In this embodiment, as shown in the reference timing chart of the V-round shown in FIG. 50, the matching determination of the number of inputs and outputs is performed from t1 (2100 ms from the start of the round) to t2 (29000 ms from the start of the round) according to the end timing of the V-round. will be executed at any timing within the range of Then, when it is determined that there is no match in the match determination, the retry operation is performed for 300 ms after a further 1500 ms has elapsed from the execution timing of the match determination. Then, after 900 ms from the end of the retry operation, an error notification for 10000 ms is executed, and then the error notification is terminated, the big winning opening closing process is terminated (completed), and the next round is started.

If it is determined in S2806 that it is not time to execute (start time) the retry operation (NO in S2806), then it is determined whether it is time to execute (start time) error notification (S2808). If it is determined in S2808 that it is not time to execute error notification (NO in S2808), it is determined whether it is time to end error notification (S2810). If it is determined in S2810 that it is not time to end the error notification (NO in S2810), the process ends. For example, if this is the period (period of 900 ms+600 ms) before the start of the retry operation after it has been determined that there is no match as described above, the input/discharge number match determination process is executed again. If it is determined to be a match at this time, the process proceeds to S2803, and if it is determined to be a mismatch again, it is again determined whether or not it is time to execute the retry operation. The same applies hereinafter.

In this way, the input/discharge number match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt cycle, so the first input/discharge number match determination is performed at the end of the interval period of the chance round (round 1 and round 2). , until the retry operation is executed, a plurality of input/discharge number matching determinations including the first determination are executed. If it is determined that the number of input/output matches for the second and subsequent times, the subsequent processing (retry operation and error notification) is not executed, the closing processing flag is turned OFF, and the processing ends. Also, the end of the interval period coincides with the end of the specific area opening/closing pattern, and if the state at the end of the specific area opening/closing pattern is the open state, the specific area opening/closing pattern is ended. An extra period of 900 ms is provided after the closed state.

As described above, during the extra period, passage through the specific area 39 is treated as valid. That is, since there are cases where this extra period is set after the first matching determination of the input/discharge number is performed (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 52), it is determined that there is no match in the first matching determination of the input/discharge number. However, when a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the extra period, it is determined that the number of entered and ejected games does not match even though the game is originally normal. Even in such a case, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of input/discharge number match determinations before execution of the retry operation. It is possible to end the big winning opening closing process without performing a retry operation or an error notification. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the determination of the number of incoming/outgoing matches is executed a plurality of times during the 900 ms of the extra period, when the game ball passes through the specified area or the non-specified area during the extra period, the It is possible to quickly end the big winning opening closing process without performing unnecessary processing (retry operation or error notification).

In addition, in this embodiment, due to the interrupt cycle, the input/discharge number coincidence determination is also executed during the period (600 ms) after the end of the extra period and before the start of the retry operation. In a state in which the game ball is surely reflected, it is possible to surely execute the input/discharge number matching determination process before performing the retry operation or error notification. In addition, if it is determined that there is no match in this extra period and the subsequent 600 ms period, the movable piece is moved in a predetermined pattern because there is a possibility that ball clogging or the like has occurred. Execute retry operation to operate. This retry operation pattern is preferably a pattern different from the specific area opening/closing operation pattern. In this embodiment, due to the interrupt cycle, it is possible to execute the input/discharge number match determination multiple times during the period (900 ms) after the end of the retry operation and before the execution of the error notification. When the ball clogging is eliminated, it is determined that the number of entered and ejected matches is determined before the error notification, and it is possible to complete the big winning opening closing process without performing the error notification. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether the number of entrances and exits coincides multiple times even during execution of the error notification, it is possible to end the error notification at the timing when it is determined that the number matches, and complete the big winning opening closing process. Become. As a result, it is possible to provide game control that does not cause the player to feel uneasy without executing unnecessary error processing. Also, this makes it possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is not determined that there is a match in the input/discharge number match determination even after the error notification execution period has elapsed, the predetermined error notification period (in this embodiment, 10000 ms) will be terminated. Completion of the closing process of the winning opening allows the transition to the next round. During the 10000ms error notification, the game parlor side can check the gaming machine and take some action so that the normal game can be continued. In addition, there may be cases where there is no clogging of balls and the occurrence of noise, etc., and it is determined that there is no match in the match determination of the number of incoming and outgoing balls. It is possible to cancel the error and restart the game quickly.

If it is determined in S2806 that it is time to execute (start) the retry operation (YES in S2806), the retry operation is executed (S2807), and the process ends. If it is determined in S2808 that it is time to issue an error notification (YES in S2808), an error notification is performed (S2809), and the process ends. If it is determined that it is time to terminate the error notification (YES in S2810), the error notification is terminated (S2811), the closing processing flag is turned OFF (S2812), and the processing is terminated. By turning off this closing process flag, it is possible to indicate that the big winning opening closing process has been completed.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36), which will be described later. In S2201, when it is determined that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), the variable probability counter is set to "10000" (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). , the time saving flag is turned ON (S2205), the time saving counter is set to "10000" (S2206), and the process ends. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability state based on whether the V flag is ON in the game state setting process. ing.

Here, when the V flag is ON, the number of times set in the probability variation counter is the number of times that the special symbol propriety determination can be executed with a high probability. This value of "10,000" times is substantially the next big hit, considering the jackpot probability in the high probability state, the business hours of the game hall per day, and the number of special symbol success/failure determinations that can be executed during the business hours. It is the same as guaranteeing a high-probability state until it occurs or until business hours are over. Therefore, when the V flag is turned ON and the high probability state is set, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big win occurs (substantially synonymous). In addition, when the variable probability flag is ON, the time saving counter is similarly set to "10000" times, so while this high probability state is set, the time saving state (open extension state) is also set. It can be said that It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, by setting the value of "10000" times to the variable probability counter and the short time counter, it is possible to substantially set the high probability high base state until the next time, or the V flag is ON In the case of (2), a control may be adopted in which a high-probability-high base state is set until the next big win actually occurs without setting a value in the counter.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag is OFF in S2201 (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not it is the 7R fifth jackpot that ends without turning the variable probability flag ON (S2207). In S2207, it is not the 7R 5th jackpot that ended, that is, the other jackpots shown in FIG. 7 jackpot or 2R 8th jackpot) If it is determined (NO in S2207), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2208), "100" is set to the time saving counter (S2209), and the process is finished. . Thereby, the game state after this big hit game becomes a low probability state, a time saving state and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). This low-probability-high base state ends when any of the following conditions are satisfied: that the special symbol is displayed 100 times (the special symbol propriety judgment is performed 100 times), and that the next big hit occurs. do. Further, the time saving counter and the variable probability counter count the number of times of adding up the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. In this way, even if there is a "V-passing planned jackpot" such as the first jackpot on the 15th round, if there is no game ball shot or the like, and there is no passing through the specific area during the V-round for some reason, the probability is high. Without being set, it will be in a short time state (low probability high base state).

Also, in S2207, when it is determined that the 7R fifth jackpot is finished (YES in S2207), the processing is finished without turning ON the variable probability flag and without turning ON the time saving flag. That is, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, when the V flag is OFF (not passed through the specific area (also referred to as "not passed through the specific area")), the game state after the big hit game is a low probability state and It is set to the low base state (low probability low base state).

[Specific area sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S207) next to the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined in S2401 that there is no detection by the specific area sensor 39a (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is detection by the specific area sensor 39a (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is the specific area effective period (S2402). The specified area valid period is a period set in the specified area valid period setting process (S2110) in the above-described special electric accessary product process (FIG. 32). The specific area validity period is set in the second round (V round) in the big hit game.

If it is determined in S2402 that the specific area (specific area sensor) is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), the specific area passing command is set (S2404), Finish processing. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this specific area passage command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201), and the sub control board 90 receives the specific area passage command, based on the effect pattern A predetermined game effect is executed in a display area or the like.

In addition, when it is determined in S2402 that the specified area (specific area sensor) is not in the valid period (invalid period) (NO in S2402), the invalid period passage command is set without turning on the V flag ( S2405), the process ends. If the specific area is passed during the invalid period, a predetermined error display may be performed on a display or the like that can be controlled by the main control unit. In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this invalid period passage command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201), and the sub-control board 90, based on the received invalid period passage command, The image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, the board surface lamp 5, the speaker 67, or the like may be used to give a predetermined error notification.

[Starting ball entry process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the process (S208) at the time of starting entering the ball after the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 37, in the starting ball entry process (S208), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S2502). In S2502, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. In S2503, read out the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (random number value for special symbol success/failure determination) acquired when entering the starting port depends on the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, when the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead").

It should be noted that the prior determination, jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if the high probability state jackpot determination table for the high probability state, if normal state (low probability state) for the normal state Based on the big hit determination table, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a match with the big hit determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the number of held balls data related to the second special symbol read in S2501 and the information (predetermined information) pre-determined in S2504 is generated as a special figure 2 start ball command. , is set in an output buffer for command transmission to the sub-control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S2503 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not transmitted as it is, and the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information related to the big hit, the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is how many, the big hit type , etc. can be identified by the sub-controller 90 . Also, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will be achieved when judged in a probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S2503 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Generate and set command data including information indicating the type determination random number), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination as a special figure 2 start ball command It is possible.

Then, in S2506, similarly to the processing related to the special figure 2 described above, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S2506). In S2506, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S2506, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends as it is.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S2507), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2507, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process after S2508. Here, if the time saving flag is ON, that is, if the current game state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is operating, and the special figure 2 is valid or not This is a state in which determination (see FIG. 8B) is likely to be made. In addition, in the first embodiment, digestion of special figure 2 reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of special figure 1 reservation (variation display of the first special symbol) as will be described later. (So-called special figure 2 priority change machine). In such a configuration, for example, the pre-determination of special figure 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and when the result of the pre-determination is clearly indicated as a big hit, the player Using the priority of special 2 pending digestion, intentionally eliminate special 2 pending (set to "0") at any time, and intend to hit the big hit according to special 1 with the result of pre-judgment shown It is possible to intervene technically to generate It is not preferable from the viewpoint of game fairness that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big win. Therefore, if the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing related to the advance determination of special figure 1 after S2508 is not performed, and this processing is finished.

The processing of S2508-S2510 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316-S318 described above for special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S2508), Pre-judgment is performed on the obtained random number value read out (S2509), and game information including at least the number of held balls data related to the first special symbol read out in S2501 and the information pre-determined in S2509 (pre-determination information), It is generated as a special figure 1 starting entry command and set in the output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). It should be noted that the prior determination of S2509 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S209) following the pending ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control section). When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized, and the process proceeds to S4004. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that these S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . Incidentally, the random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the effect for determining the effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 .

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100 , sound control board 106 and lamp control board 107 . Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various production devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to perform various Production (production pattern game production, special game production related to big hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, the display control of performance symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (the performance symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, the lighting control of various lamps, and the operation of the movable decorative members It is possible to perform control, voice output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not there is an input (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES at S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed (S4201). . Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed (S4202). Next, drive data output processing for outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) is performed (S4203). This driving data is also created by the 10 ms timer interrupt processing described later. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4301) and a specific effect start process (S4302), which will be described later, are performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303). Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that the start entry command has not been received. If (NO in S4395), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that the starting ball command has been received (YES in S4395), effect pending information storage processing (S4400) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4401. . Effect pending information storage processing (S4400), various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination random Numbers, game information such as fluctuation pattern random numbers), depending on the type of special design (first special design, second special design) and the number of special reserved balls at the time of sending and receiving the start ball command (at the time of command generation) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Information such as is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this manner is used for execution of various effects such as variable effects, advance notice effects, and effect modes, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are the special figure pending storage units (first special figure pending storage unit, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be the "obtained information storage means".

In S4401, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that the variation start command is received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start processing (S4402) described later is performed. When it is determined that it has not received the variation start command (NO in S4401), it proceeds to the processing of S4406 without performing the variation production start processing. In S4406, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4406), and if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4406), the production design is stopped and the fluctuation production is performed. The end processing of the fluctuation production to end is performed (S4407). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4407), the production pattern 8 is stop-displayed and a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 changes the effect pattern 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is stop-displayed, and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is terminated. On the other hand, in S4406, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4406), the process proceeds to S4408 without performing the fluctuation production end process. It should be noted that the variable performance refers to various performances performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4408, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4408), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4408), a special game (jackpot game) A special game effect selection process for selecting a pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed is performed (S4409). The special game effect includes at least the opening effect executed during the opening period before the opening of the special game (before the start of the first round) and the round game (big prize) during the special game (during the jackpot game). A round production (jackpot game production) executed in accordance with the progress of the ball game) is included. In the first embodiment, an opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the length of the opening period (opening time) is specified by the opening command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds) for the 7R 4th and 7R 5th big wins, and 8000 ms (8 seconds) for the other big wins. It's becoming The reason why the opening times of the 7R 4th and 7R 5th big wins are set shorter than the other big wins is that in the case of the 7R 4th and 7R 5th big wins, the later-described "VS chance production" is performed. This is because the "VS chance presentation" does not clearly inform the player of the occurrence of the big win, and makes it difficult for the player to recognize the timing of the start of the big win game (the start of the first round). Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4409), the effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and information based on the received opening command (opening command type, opening time, start timing A special game start time command capable of specifying a jackpot type related to a jackpot game is set in an output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . When the set special game start time command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the special game effect in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game. is executed on the display screen 7a.

Here, more specifically, when the type of jackpot is the 15R first jackpot, the 12R second jackpot, or the 12R third jackpot in a low-probability time-saving state, the set opening time (8000ms) is used. Then, a performance (starting performance) is executed so that the player can easily recognize that the big winning game is about to start, and then a predetermined round performance (big winning game performance) is executed with the start of the first round in the big winning game. to start. As the start effect, for example, characters such as "congratulations", "big win", "variable big win", etc. are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the start of a big win game (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. On the other hand, when the types of jackpots are the 7R fourth jackpot and the 7R fifth jackpot, the opening time is set to 1900 ms (1.9 seconds). A special effect (starting effect as described above) is not specially performed.

As a result, the performance executed in the opening period of 8000 ms such as the 15R first jackpot is more easily recognized than the performance executed in the opening period of 19000 ms such as the 7R fifth jackpot. It is considered a possible production. In addition, after the end of the start performance executed using the opening period of 8000ms such as this 15R first jackpot, a round performance separate from this start performance is started again, so the big win game is also started from this point. It is easily recognizable that Here, the effect executed at least during the jackpot game may be called "special effect". For example, the round effect that starts after the end of the start effect of the 15R first jackpot may be the "first special effect".

In addition, in the case of the 7R 4th jackpot and 7R 5th jackpot, during the opening period, instead of executing a start effect that allows the player to easily recognize that the jackpot game is about to start, a "VS chance game" described later is executed. It is said that the performance will be performed. Since this "VS chance production" does not directly notify the start of the big hit game, compared with the start production of the 15R first big win and the first special production, the player can start the big win game. It is said to be a production that is difficult to recognize. In addition, this "VS chance presentation" can be started from the middle of execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the 7R fourth big win or the 7R fifth big win. In addition, since it is executed as a series of effects from the middle of the variable display of the identification information to the middle of the jackpot game (until the end of the jackpot game), some players may feel as if the variable display of the identification information is continuing. sometimes received. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the start of the jackpot game. For example, the ``VS chance performance'', which starts from the middle of the variable display of the identification information of the 7R fifth big win and continues during the opening period (1.9S) and during the big win game, may be the ``second special performance''. . Also, the "VS chance performance" executed at the time of the 7R fourth big hit may be replaced with the "third special performance".

In particular, when the game state is in a state without low probability time saving (normal state), when the 7R 5th jackpot, compared to other jackpots (15R jackpot, 12R jackpot), the amount of profit (number of prize balls) that can be obtained is In addition, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a state (normal state) without a low probability of time saving. In addition, since it is set as "a scheduled jackpot that does not pass through a specific area", it does not become a high-probability state. On the other hand, when another big hit (15R jackpot, 12R jackpot, etc.) occurs, the game state after the jackpot game ends is a high-probability base state (high-probability state) or a low-probability base state (time-saving state). is set to That is, the 7R fifth jackpot can be said to be the jackpot with the lowest profit compared to the other jackpots as a jackpot (related to the special symbol 1) that normally occurs in a low-probability time-saving state. If the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a jackpot is the 7R fifth jackpot, the player is not a little discouraged, and in the worst case, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may decrease. Moreover, the possibility becomes even more conspicuous when the jackpot finally obtained after playing for a long period of time is the 7R fifth jackpot.

Therefore, as described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand the start of the jackpot game related to the 7R fifth jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his desire to play and to maintain and improve his interest in the game. In addition, a player who does not notice the start of the jackpot game related to the 7R fifth jackpot enters a special game state in which a predetermined amount of game profit (prize balls) can be obtained even though the jackpot game has not started. Sometimes I think. In such a case, it is possible to increase the interest in the game even though the big win game is executed with a low profit. In addition, regarding the jackpot game related to the 7R fourth jackpot, although the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high-probability base state, since the amount of profit obtained is small compared to other jackpots, this is also a jackpot game. By making it difficult to recognize the start of , it is possible to exhibit a certain effect. In addition, since the game state after execution of the second special effect related to the 7R fifth big hit (after the end of the big hit game) is a low-probability low base state (normal state), in this second special effect, special symbol propriety It is also possible to execute an effect that is common to the effect that is executed when the determination result is out. As a result, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the player will have the impression that the identification information is being variably displayed during execution of the second special effect. In addition, since the game state after the execution of the third special effect related to the 7R fourth big hit (after the end of the big win game) is a high probability high base state (high probability state), in this third special effect, special symbols It is also possible to execute an effect that is common to the effect that is executed when the result of the win/fail determination is a win.

Here, the "common effect" includes effects that are partly different and partly the same among the effects that are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and those that are completely the same. . In addition, "some effects are the same" includes effects using the same character image and effects using the same image data (differences only in display size are included in the same effect) . "Some effects are different" means, for example, that the character image executed in the effect is the same but the background display mode and color are different, or the character image is the same but the design (effect design) is displayed or not. It is possible to mention different aspects.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main control board 80 (S4410), and if it is determined that the ending command is received (YES in S4410), the pattern of the special game end production (ending production) and the special Ending effect selection processing for selecting the type of effect mode after the end of the game is performed (S4411), and the processing of S4412 (FIG. 44) is performed. In the first embodiment, the main control board 80 transmits an ending command corresponding to the type of jackpot and whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game (second round). , the length of the ending period (ending time) is specified by the ending command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, as a result of the special symbol suitability determination in the low-probability-low base state, the ending time when the type of the jackpot is the 15R first jackpot and the 15R sixth jackpot is If there is passage, it will be 17000 ms (17 seconds), and if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, it will be 8000 ms (8 seconds). The difference in the ending times between the 15R first jackpot and the 15R sixth jackpot will be described later in detail.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as a result of the special symbol suitability determination in the low-probability-low base state, the ending time when the type of the big hit is the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit is set to the game ball to the specific area 39. 8000 ms (8 seconds) is the same whether there is a passage or not, and the content of the ending presentation (ending presentation pattern) to be executed is the same. The reason why the ending time and the ending effect are the same regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is that after the big hit game related to the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit ends, the "probability non-notification state (non-notification state) This is because the notification mode)” is generated. That is, as described above, for the 12R second big win and the 12R third big win, the type of the big win is determined based on the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening during the big win game, the production related to the big win, and the like. is difficult for players. The game state after the end of the jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot is a "high-probability-high base state" or a "low-probability-high base state", but for the player, it is a high-base state. This results in a "probability non-announcement state" in which it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high-probability state, although the state can be recognized. In order to improve the game playability and game interest in this "probability non-report state", the ending time and the ending effect are set to be the same. This point is the same for the 2R seventh jackpot and the 2R eighth jackpot.

Then, in the ending effect selection process (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect, information based on the received ending command (type of ending command, ending time, type of jackpot related to the finished jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends effect mode, etc.) is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set special game end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to display an effect related to the end of the jackpot game. run on. On the other hand, in S4408, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (NO in S4408), the process proceeds to S4410 without performing the special game effect selection process, and it is determined that the ending command has not been received in S4410. If so (NO at S4410), the process proceeds to S4412 (FIG. 44) without performing the ending effect selection process.

In S4412, it is determined whether or not the specific area passing command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4412). If it is determined that the specific area passing command has been received (YES in S4412), the specific area If the V passing flag indicating that the game ball passed (V passing) to 39 is turned ON (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414, and it is determined that the specific area passing command has not been received (S4412 NO), the process proceeds to S4414 without turning ON the V passage flag. If the V passage flag is turned ON in S4413, a V passage specifying command for notifying that V passage has occurred is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 accordingly. When the set V passage designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines whether the jackpot game being executed is the 15R first jackpot or the 15R sixth jackpot. If it is a jackpot game (15R jackpot game), a V passage notification performance for notifying that V passage has occurred is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁As the V-pass notification effect, for example, a character image of "V" is displayed on the display screen 7a, or an effect sound representing V-passage is output. On the other hand, the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game other than the 15R jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot or the 12R third jackpot (12R jackpot game), or the 7R fourth jackpot or the 7R fifth jackpot. In the case of the jackpot game (7R jackpot game) concerned, or the jackpot game (2R jackpot game) associated with the 2R seventh jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot, the aforementioned V passing notification effect is not executed. As described above, after the 12R jackpot game and after the 2R jackpot game are finished, the "probability non-notification state" is set, so even if there is V passage, it is not notified to that effect. In addition, in the case of a 7R jackpot game, an effect corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is performed in the "VS chance effect" described later, so even if there is V passing, at this point (when receiving V passing designation command) We will not notify you of this. However, in order to ensure the fairness of the game, the V passage notification effect may be performed also in the case of the 12R big win, the 7R big win and the 2R big win. In this case, it is desirable that the V-pass notification effect be performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize as compared with the normal effect so as not to impair the playability of the probability non-report state and the effect of the VS chance effect. Specifically, characters, figures, symbols, etc. indicating the occurrence of V passage are displayed in small sizes in the corners of the display screen 7a, or included in an LED display (for example, the effect display 102, etc.) separate from the image display device 7. Lighting or blinking of an LED can be exemplified.

Subsequently, in S4414, it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4414), and if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4421. , if it is determined that a round start command has been received (YES in S4414), the round designation command corresponding to the received round start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4415), and the process of S4416 is performed. Transition. The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information that can specify the number of the round to be started (start round), and the production control microcomputer 91 receives The round number of the starting round is specified based on the round start command, and a round specifying command indicating the round number is set in the output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the image display device 7 to display a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command. It is executed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in S4416, it is determined whether the number of rounds specified based on the round start command received in S4114, that is, the number of rounds of the start round is 3R (S4416), and if not 3R (NO in S4416), The process proceeds to S4421, and if 3R (YES in S4416), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON (S4417). When it is determined that the V passage flag is ON (YES in S4417), the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the second round of the big hit game, that is, in the V round (specific round, specific entry ball game). (V passage), the V passage effect designation command instructing the execution of the effect display corresponding to the passage is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4418), and the V passage flag is set. is turned off (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4421. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passage flag is not ON (it is OFF) in S4417 (NO in S4417), it means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, the V non-pass effect specifying command for instructing the execution of the effect display corresponding to the non-pass is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4420), and the process proceeds to S4421. When the V passing effect designation command or the V non-passing effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 receives the predetermined timing after the third round of the current jackpot game. Then, an effect corresponding to V passing or V not passing is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁Here, when the jackpot game being executed is the 7R jackpot game, the effect corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is performed in the "VS chance effect" described later. In the case of the 15R jackpot game, a round effect corresponding to V passing or a round effect corresponding to V non-passing is performed as round effects from the third round onward. In the case of the 15R jackpot game, since the V notification effect has been executed at the timing when the V pass flag is turned ON as described above, the effect corresponding to the V pass or the V non-pass is not performed in the third round and thereafter. good too. Further, in the case of the 12R jackpot game and in the case of the 2R jackpot game, as described above, after the jackpot game ends, the "probability non-notification state" occurs. During a predetermined period after the end, in principle, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 does not display the effect corresponding to the passing of the V or the non-passing of the V. FIG.

Finally, other processing is performed in S4421, and this processing ends. As other processing performed in S4421, processing based on received commands other than the above-described commands (for example, normal design variation start command, normal design variation stop command, etc.) is performed.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the fluctuation effect start process (S4402) performed based on the reception of the fluctuation start command in the received command analysis process (S4301) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable effect start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 generates a variable effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, a effect symbol determination random number, a specific effect determination random number, and the like. Random number processing for effect determination (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers is performed. In the first embodiment, at the timing of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 80, the process of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value, the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the information specifying the variation pattern includes variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. and pattern information designating the type of jackpot (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether (variation display of the production pattern) is related to the special figure 1 or related to the special figure 2. It should be noted that these variation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect will be different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as the characters, items, and background images that appear. Also, when providing a plurality of game effects (announcement effects, ready-to-win effects, etc.), it may be possible to execute different game effects depending on the effect mode. In the first embodiment, production mode A (mode status "1") is executed when it is controlled to a low probability low base state, production mode B (mode status "2") is a low probability high base state (time saving game state), and the effect mode C (mode status "3") is executed when it is controlled to a high-probability-high base state (probability-variable game state). Therefore, the player can grasp the current game state by confirming which of the presentation modes A to C is.

In addition, in production mode D (mode status "4") or production mode E (mode status "5"), the jackpot games related to the 12R second big win, 12R third big win, 2R seventh big win and 2R eighth big win are performed. It is executed when it is controlled to the low probability-high base state or high probability-high base state after being broken and in the "probability non-announcement state". Therefore, when the performance mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the performance mode, the player can grasp whether the probability state of special symbol suitability determination is in a high probability state or a low probability state (normal state). It is difficult to In that sense, the production modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in S4504, a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern) performed using the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. is set (S4504). . Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80, the variation production pattern determination table to be used is set. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table is set. In the first embodiment, since a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, from among these variable effect pattern determination tables , a table corresponding to the mode status (current rendering mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set. The variable performance pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the performance symbol game performance (variation mode of performance symbols, etc.), and a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. It is At S4504, one of the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables is set.

Subsequently, in S4505, based on the variable performance determination random number obtained in S4501 and the variable performance pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variable performance pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it (S4505) . As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing the reach production (reach-with production pattern game production) and when executing the character production performed using a specific character (character production pattern game production), the reach production and the character A case where the production is not executed (ready-to-win non-production symbol game production) is determined. In addition, the ready-to-win effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol propriety determination indicates that the result is a big hit, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double). 2 of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) with the patterns constituting the big win mode, and the remaining one is displayed. It means an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a pattern that completes the big win mode in a state where the symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. A performance symbol 8 stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance is an odd-numbered symbol such as ``777'' when the result of special symbol success/failure determination is a 15R big hit, and ``666'' or the like when a 12R big hit. It is considered to be Zoro eyes of the even number pattern. Also, when there is no reach, one of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" is different from the other production patterns, and "635" etc. when there is no reach. At least one of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is selected as a separate pattern from which the other performance symbols are different. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, three performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in the same manner (separate eyes) as when the 2R and 7R jackpots are won. However, for the 2R and 7R big hits, a predetermined chance number such as "135" or a dedicated symbol such as "3*3" may be stopped and displayed. Incidentally, the above-described stop display mode of the performance symbol 8 is an example, and it is possible to appropriately change what to stop display as the stop performance symbol when a big win is achieved.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, as the variation mode (variation performance pattern) of the performance pattern 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as "SP reach") A, super reach B, Super reach C, character effects, etc. are set, and in S4505, based on the variable effect pattern determination table, which effect is performed or not performed (this is also called "normal variation") is determined. Then, when the ready-to-win effect symbol game effect is executed, any ready-to-win effect is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variable effect pattern determination table. Here, as the effect pattern game effect, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of a big win is set to be higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super ready-to-win effect is a game effect with a high jackpot reliability (possibility of winning a big hit) compared to the ready-to-win (normal reach) effect. The ready-to-win effect can be set (executed) mainly when a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) with a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received. In addition, in the first embodiment, as a kind of super reach (SP reach), a showdown reach production ( 3rd production) is provided, and when the ally character wins in the confrontation reach production, the confirmation of the big hit is notified. There are four types of showdown reach production patterns, showdown reach A to D, and each showdown reach has a different enemy character (opponent). Such a confrontation ready-to-win effect can be set (executed) when a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) with a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern specified based on the variation pattern information included in the received variation start command (variation pattern designation command) is any one of the jackpot variation patterns P1 to P3, If the jackpot type specified based on the pattern information included in the same command is the 7R jackpot (7R fourth jackpot, 7R fifth jackpot), the "VS chance "Direction" is to start. This "VS chance production" is performed until the 7R big hit game is completed, and is both a variable production and a special game production. Details of the "VS chance presentation" will be described later.

In S4505, a variable effect pattern corresponding to any of various variable effects including these "ready effect" and "VS chance effect" is set in response to the results of the processing of S4501-S4504 (S4505). Then, in subsequent S4506, a variable effect start command for starting the effect pattern game effect etc. based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4506), and the variable effect End start processing. When the variable effect start command set in S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 changes the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, namely Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variable effect etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Specific production start process]
Next, the specific effect start process (S4302) performed in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described. The specific effect means the aforementioned "VS chance effect". As shown in FIG. 46, in the specific production start process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the variable production (production pattern game production) is executed (S4601), and if it is not executed (NO in S4601) , If the process is finished as it is (YES in S4601), it moves to the process of S4602, and the variable performance being executed is a variable performance related to "7R jackpot (7R fourth jackpot, 7R fifth jackpot)" (S4602). Then, if the variable performance being executed is not a variable performance related to the "7R big hit" (NO in S4602), that is, any of "off", "15R big hit", "12R big hit" and "2R big hit" If it is such a variable effect (NO in S4602), the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the variable effect being executed is the variable effect related to the "7R big hit" (YES in S4602), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (S4603). In the present embodiment 1, the start timing of the specific effect (VS chance effect) is the timing when the remaining execution time of the variable effect (remaining variable time of the special symbol) related to the "7R jackpot" is 3 seconds. The remaining execution time of the variable production is, for example, by starting the operation triggered by the setting of the variable production start command by the above-mentioned S4506, the fluctuation production is almost synchronized with the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the main control board 80 side. It is possible to specify by a timer that can measure the execution time (clock means configured by the program of the effect control microcomputer 91).

In S4603, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (NO in S4603), the process ends as it is, and if it is determined that it is time to start (YES in S4603), the specific effect (VS chance effect) effect) is selected from a plurality of predetermined effect patterns, and the selected specific effect pattern is set (S4604). In S4604, a random number lottery based on the specific effect determination random number is performed to select one of the plurality of specific effect patterns. The random number lottery here is performed using the specific effect determination random number included in the effect determination random number acquired in S4501. Then, a specific effect start command for starting a specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the effect pattern set in S4604 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4605), and the specific effect start process is terminated. do. When the specific effect start command set in S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 generates a specific effect effect pattern specified based on the specific effect start command. That is, the predetermined image data corresponding to the specific effect pattern set in S4605 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the "VS chance effect" based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run.

Here, the "VS chance effect" as the specific effect is started at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds of the variable effect related to the 7R jackpot, as described above, and then continues until the 7R jackpot game ends. there is Further, a plurality of specific effect patterns to be selected in the process of S4604 are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, specifically, four types of specific effect patterns are stored. As the production pattern (specific production pattern) of the "VS chance production" of the first embodiment, a showdown scene (showdown image) similar to the four showdown reach (showdown reach A to D) in the showdown reach production described above is displayed. It has four specific production patterns (showdown A to showdown D), and in S4604, one of these four specific production patterns is selected and set, and a showdown scene based on this set specific production pattern is generated. (Any one of confrontation A to confrontation D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during execution of the 7R jackpot game. The ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 stores in advance image data corresponding to the four confrontation reach effects in the confrontation reach effect, and the image data is used when executing the confrontation reach effect. However, since a similar confrontation scene (competition image) is displayed in the VS chance production, the image data is also used in executing the VS chance production. By diverting the image data used in the ready-to-win effect (variable effect) to the VS chance effect (variable effect and special game effect) in this manner, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the image ROM. In addition, by performing the same confrontation scene production (second production) as the confrontation reach production (third production) as a variable production as a special game production (round production) during the 7R big hit game, It is possible to give the player the impression that a variable performance (confrontation ready-to-reach performance) is being performed in spite of the presence.

After starting a specific effect (VS chance effect) by the processing of S4302, when receiving an opening command, an ending command, a round start command, etc. in the received command analysis processing (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) (S4408, S4410 , S4414), the process related to the execution of the effect display based on the command reception is performed as the process related to the execution (progress) of the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the specific effect pattern set in the above-described process of S4604. Further, after the specific effect (VS chance effect) is started, when the V pass effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-pass effect designation command (S4420) is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU of the image control board 100 Processing is performed to display the ending of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) in the specific effect (VS chance effect) being executed in association with V passing or V non-passing. In other words, the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604 includes information (match type information) indicating which of the matches A to D corresponds to, but does not include information indicating the result of the match (win or lose). There is nothing. In the first embodiment, the image data for displaying "the ending of the confrontation scene corresponding to passing V" and "the ending of the confrontation scene corresponding to not passing V" for each of the confrontations A to D are image data. It is stored in advance in the ROM (image ROM) of the control board 100 . Therefore, when displaying the ending of the confrontation scene, the CPU of the image control board 100 responds to the received V passing effect designation command or V non-passing effect designation command with the image data for ending display corresponding to the confrontation scene being executed. By reading out based on the image data and performing an effect display using the image data, the ending of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) is displayed in a manner corresponding to whether the V has passed or the V has not passed. It should be noted that the image data used to indicate the ending (big win or loss) of the confrontation ready-to-win effect (fluctuation effect) may be used as the image data for displaying the ending of the confrontation scene (showdown effect).

The above is the main processing of the effect control in the first embodiment. In the "7R 4th big win" and "7R 5th big win", the specific effect ("VS chance effect" in this example) is performed as described above. This "VS chance performance" and the second big prize opening 35 for the 1st and 2nd rounds of the above-mentioned "7R 4th jackpot (V-passing planned jackpot)" and "7R 5th jackpot (V non-passing jackpot)" In cooperation with the characteristic opening pattern (opening/closing operation), it is made more difficult to distinguish (distinguish) between the "7R fourth big win" and the "7R fifth big win", and the game state after the big win game ends is a high probability state. It is possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) whether or not it becomes. The "VS chance presentation" will be described in detail below.

[VS Chance Production]
53 and 54 show a series of display modes from the start (occurrence) to the end of the VS chance presentation executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. In addition, the VS chance production (specific production) of the present embodiment 1 is mainly "introductory production (introductory scene)" shown in FIGS. 54(g)-(h1) and (h2). As described above, in the first embodiment, there are four specific effect patterns, and the specific effect patterns have different contents of "showdown effect (showdown scene)" (showdown A to D). Although details will be described later, the selection effect includes an effect (selection effect 2 to be described later) indicating which one of the confrontations A to D is selected (selection result). For this reason, at least four effects modes (effect patterns) are provided for each of the "selection effect" and the "confrontation effect".

First, in FIG. 53(a), three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are respectively "5", "6", and "5" in the process of progressing the production pattern game production (variable production). A temporary stop display is shown approximately in the center. Temporary stop display means that the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet and the special symbols are not stopped and displayed. means that Therefore, in the temporary stop display, each individual production pattern 8 is shown in a state of slightly moving on the display screen 7a (shaking (also called change). When a character image of a girl appears from this state as shown in FIG. 53(b), three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (production pattern display area 7b) are displayed in small sizes on the upper left of the display screen 7a. (reduced display), and the variable display is resumed at that position while maintaining the small size (introduction effect 1). The "appearance of a girl character" and the "reduced display of the effect pattern 8" in the introductory effect 1 shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the timing at which the remaining time (remaining variation time of the special symbol) reaches about 3 seconds until the end of the symbol variation is set as the start timing of the specific effect.

Then, when about 3 seconds have passed since the display of the introductory effect 1 shown in FIG. The occurrence (start) of is notified to the player (introduction effect 2). At this time, the sub-control board 90 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control board 80 (S4406), and the image control board 100 receives the fluctuation performance end command transmitted by the sub-control board 90 based on this. As a result, when the introductory effect 2 is executed, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been variably displayed in a small size at the upper left of the display screen 7a, are in the same manner as when they are out (separate eyes: here "325") is stopped (confirmed). Here, the finalized display of the production pattern 8 shown in FIG. 53(c) is performed in an extremely short time. display), and the display mode of the display screen 7a shifts to the mode (introduction effect 3) shown in FIG. 53(d). Therefore, the pattern confirmation effect (fourth effect) relating to the stop display (confirmation display) of the effect pattern 8 performed when the introduction effect 2 (FIG. 53(c)) is executed is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. It will happen. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the fixed display time of the production pattern 8 in the introduction production 2 is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). 53(b) to (d), the effect display related to the "introductory effect (first effect)", that is, the effect (first effect) in which the character image of the girl is mainly displayed from the introductory effect 1 to the introductory effect 3 ) is an effect displayed both during execution of the variable effect shown in FIG. In other words, it is both a variable production and a special game production.

Then, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the introduction performance 2 of FIG. 53(c) is performed is a state in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed as 7R big win symbols, and at this time, the 7R big win from the main control board 80. The sub-control board 90 receives the opening command (S4408), and the image control board 100 receives the special game start command from the sub-control board 90 based on this. As a result, on the display screen 7a of the painter display device 7, the introductory effect 3 of FIG. 53(d) is executed. Here, the opening period (1900ms) of the 7R jackpot is shorter than the opening period (8000ms) of the other jackpots. The effect image (girl character image) displayed in the introductory effect 2 is continuously displayed in the introductory effect 3 without performing any effect. That is, the background images of the introductory effects 2 and 3 are the same. In this way, ``the opening period should be set to a short time and the background image should not be changed without performing the opening effect'', and the above-mentioned ``short-time fixed display of the effect pattern 8 (in this example, the fixed display of the separated eyes) and the effect pattern 8 By the synergistic effect with "erasure of", it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing (starting timing of the jackpot game) at which the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) is opened for the first time.

As shown in FIG. 53(d), in the introductory effect 3, a message (“Please aim at the attacker”) prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 (V attacker), and On the other hand, a launch navigation image 8n is displayed to instruct the player's launch position. After that, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, that is, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game is finished and the interval period (2 seconds) is finished, the display mode of the display screen 7a is as shown in FIG. It changes from the introductory effect 3 of 53(d) to the selection effects 1 and 2 of FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f). In the selection effect 1 of FIG. 53(e), there is a effect (hereinafter also referred to as a "roulette effect") for selecting in a roulette format which of the "showdowns A to D" will be the confrontation to be executed in the VS chance effect this time. 53(f), the result of the roulette effect is displayed together with the enemy character image 8b. This selection result corresponds to the specific effect pattern selected and set in S4604 in the above-described specific effect start process (S4302). Such a change from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 is at the timing when about 60000 ms (6 seconds) have elapsed from the start of the second V attacker release (16000 ms release shown in FIG. 49) after the start of the 7R jackpot game. done. Then, the selection effect 2 (result display of the roulette effect) is performed until the third round of the 7R big win game is started. By such a selection performance, it is possible to increase the degree of interest of the player in the confrontation scene (challenge performance) to be started thereafter, and to enhance the performance effect of the VS chance performance, thereby improving the game interest during the jackpot game. It is possible to plan Further, from the selection effect 1 onward in FIG. 53(e), since the jackpot game is in progress, the launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters "right shot" and "right direction" are shown) to instruct the player to hit to the right. symbol) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Confrontation A to D (confrontation production patterns) to be selected in the roulette production are productions in which the confrontation scene is configured in the same manner as the confrontation reach A to D in the above-described confrontation reach production.

Here, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the screen shown in FIG. ) to (f) show a series of effects (first effect), that is, introduction effects 1 to 3 and selection effects 1 and 2 are performed, 1 round and 2 rounds (V round) of "7R 4th big hit", The effect display mode is the same as that of the 1st round of the "7R 5th jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the 1st and 2nd rounds (V round) of the "7R 4th big win" and the 1st round of the "7R 5th big win", the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) The mode of opening and closing operation is the same. Therefore, for the player, any of the "7R fourth big win" or the "7R fifth big win" occurs at least from the end of the variable performance relating to the 7R big win to the start of the third round of the 7R big win game. It is extremely difficult to recognize (determine) whether or not the As a result, at least, from the start of the 7R jackpot game (the first V-attacker release start shown in FIG. 49, introduction effect 3 in FIG. 53(d)) until the end of the round game after the second V-attacker release ( Until the start of the interval after the second opening of the V attacker shown in FIG. 49, up to the selection effect 2 in FIG. One round of the 7R 5th jackpot" can be recognized by the player as one "chance round" in which a game ball is entered by a V attacker and the game ball aims to pass through a specific area 39.例文帳に追加. In this sense, through one chance round (1 round + 2 rounds), based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it is determined whether the game state after the big hit game is a high probability state or not. It is also possible to regard it as a "decision game".

Then, after the start of the 7R jackpot game, when the V attacker is released for the second time (16000 ms release), in the case of the "7R fourth jackpot", the previous first release is regarded as one round. , when the V attacker is released for the second time, it will advance to the second round (V round). During this opening, the movable piece 150 in the V-attacker is in an operating state (specific area opening), so when the V-attacker is opened for the second time or later in the "7R 4th big hit" (2nd to 7th times shown in the upper part of FIG. 49) When the game ball is released), at least one of the entered game balls passes through the specific area 39 with a high probability (see FIG. 47(b)). On the other hand, in the case of the "7R 5th jackpot", as in the case of the "7R 4th jackpot", although the first opening has been completed, it is still in the 1st round (it has not progressed to the 2nd round). Therefore, when the V attacker is opened for the second time or later in the round (when opening the second to seventh times shown in the lower part of FIG. 49), the movable piece 150 does not enter the operating state (specific area closed), and the game is played at the time of this opening. Even if the ball is entered into the V-attacker, the entering game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 (see FIG. 47(a)). As described above, in the first embodiment, the degree of difficulty (difficulty) of determining the 7R jackpot type is increased in terms of both the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker (second big winning hole 35) and the performance display mode. In particular, in order to open the second V attacker of "7R 4th big hit" at the same progress as the second V attacker opening of "7R 5th big hit" as 2 rounds (V round), "7R 4th big hit" By ending the opening of the V-attacker in the first round in a short period of time (opening of 100 ms), the apparent identity with the opening of the V-attacker of the "7R 5th big hit" is secured (Fig. 49 ). As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the "chance round" having different V passability as one "chance round" in which it is difficult to see through the difference. For this reason, the first round in which the first V-attacker opening (100 ms opening) of the "7R 4th jackpot" is performed is a so-called dummy round (pseudo round, non-specific round, non-specific ball entry game). It can be said.

Then, in the 7R 4th jackpot, when the first interval period after the second opening of the V-attacker ends, the 3rd round proceeds, and in the 7R 5th jackpot, the first interval period after the second opening of the V-attacker is completed, proceed to the 2nd round (V round), and in the round, the V attacker is released for a short period of time (100 ms), and then the 3rd round (see FIG. 49). With the start of the third round, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the selection effect 2 of FIG. The scene is changed to the confrontation production shown in FIG. 54(g), and an ally character image 8a is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thus, when the "chance round" ends and the third round starts, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes greatly. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the V-attacker short opening (momentary opening and closing) before the start of the third round in the "7R fifth big win", that is, the presence of the V-attacker short opening in the second round. . In addition, since the opening time of the V attacker in the second round (V round) of the 7R fifth big hit is 100 ms (0.1 seconds), the possibility of the game ball entering the V attacker is extremely low, and the game ball The possibility of passing through the specific area 39 is also extremely low.

When the showdown effect of FIG. 54(g) is displayed with the start of the third round, the sub-control board 90 receives the 3R-th round start command from the main control board 80 (S4414, S4415), and based on this. The image control board 100 receives the V passing effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passing effect designation command (S4420) from the sub control board 90 . After the 3rd round, a confrontation scene (confrontation effect) between the friend character image 8a and the enemy character image 8b is developed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the progress of the rounds, and the confrontation scene is displayed by the end of the 7th round of the 7R jackpot game. ending is displayed. The ending of the confrontation scene differs depending on whether the image control board 100 receives the V pass effect designation command or the V non-pass effect designation command. is shown. That is, if the V passing effect designation command is received, the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and it is confirmed that the high probability state will occur after the jackpot game is finished, so the display screen 7a. The display mode of is the ally character victory presentation shown in FIG. 54(h1). On the other hand, if the V non-passing effect designation command is received, the game ball has not passed through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and the high probability state (normal state) does not occur after the jackpot game ends. Since it is confirmed, the display mode of the display screen 7a becomes the friendly character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54(h2). From this, it can be said that the production (confrontation production) related to the confrontation scene shown in (g), (h1), and (h2) of FIG. It should be noted that the ``result notification effect'' can be understood to refer to the ``whole confrontation effect'' in a broad sense, and to refer to the ``friend character victory effect'' and the ``friend character defeat effect'' in a narrow sense. Then, when the ally character victory presentation of FIG. 54(h1) is executed, there is a high possibility that the 7R big win this time is the "7R fourth big win", and the ally character defeat presentation of FIG. 54(h2) is executed. If so, there is a high possibility that the current 7R big win is the "7R 5th big win".

In addition, the confrontation production (second production) performed from (g) to (h1) or (h2) in FIG. The confrontation effect (second effect) that is performed shows the same confrontation scene as the confrontation reach effect (one mode of SP reach) that is performed as the variable effect. For each confrontation effect (second effect) of the confrontations A to D, a friendly character victory effect in which the V is passed and a friendly character defeat effect in which the V is not passed are provided. , As a production mode that develops from the start to the end (display of the ending) of the confrontation production (showdown scene), a production mode that leads to the victory of the ally character and a production mode that leads to the defeat of the V ally character are provided for each confrontation production. there is The VS chance effect (specific effect) is designed in consideration of the progress of the round game (round completion) based on the entry of a specified number of game balls to the V attacker and the specified release time of the V attacker. Therefore, in introduction effects 1 to 3 and selection effects 1 and 2 (see FIGS. 53(b) to (f)) performed before the start of the third round, game balls are appropriately shot. As long as there is, it progresses according to the ball entry status (round progress status) of the game ball to the V attacker until the start of the 3rd round, and even if it takes time to complete the round due to delays in launching, etc. It progresses according to the round digestion. Similarly, the confrontation performance (see FIGS. 54(g), (h1), and (h2)) performed from the 3rd round to the 7th round is also performed in the 7th round as long as the game ball is properly launched. It progresses according to the ball entry status (round progress status) of the game ball to the V attacker until the end. continue. Then, the confrontation effect (VS chance effect) ends at the end of the 7th round.

When the 7 rounds of the 7R jackpot game are completed, the sub control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), and based on this, the special game end command from the sub control board 90 is sent to the image control board 100. receives. As a result, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the friendly character victory presentation shown in FIG. 54(h1) to the ending presentation shown in FIG. 54(i1), or from the friendly character defeat presentation shown in FIG. 54(i2) shows a variable effect. When the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R 4th big hit game this time, the ending image (here, the characters "entering the probability variable mode") related to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 (i1) is displayed. be done. In addition, although not shown, in the present embodiment 1, in the same display mode as FIG. 54 (i1), instead of "probability change mode entry", it has an ending image that is a character display of "time reduction mode entry". . This is an ending image displayed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big win game. However, since the 7R 4th jackpot is set as a "specific area passage scheduled jackpot", if the game is played normally, the possibility of displaying this "time saving mode entry" image is low. In addition, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit game, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round, the variable production screen (production patterns 8L, 8C) shown in FIG. , 8R). The ending image shown in FIG. 54(i2) is rendered as "indicating transition to normal mode".

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as described above, the ending time specified based on the ending command from the main control board 80 is different between the 7R fourth big win and the 7R fifth big win. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth jackpot in the low probability base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the mode of FIG. 54 (h1) to that of FIG. 54 (i1) If the mode changes, the ending time will be 17000 ms (17 seconds). Also, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth jackpot in the low-probability-low base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the mode of FIG. If the mode changes, the ending time will be 8000 ms (8 seconds). In addition, when the 7R fifth big hit is achieved in the low-probability-low base state, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the mode shown in FIG. 54(h2) to the mode shown in FIG. , and the ending time becomes 5000 ms (5 seconds). The reason why the ending time is different in this way is that if the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a "probability variable game state (high probability high base state)" that is advantageous to the player, the ending time is lengthened. It is effective to positively indicate that the ending effect is to shift to the “probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state)”, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is “low probability state and non-time-saving state (low This is because there is little need to expend time and dare to inform the player that the game will be in a normal game state with no particular advantage.

In the present embodiment 1, when the 7R fifth jackpot is won, even if the sub-control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), the corresponding effect (ending effect) is especially performed. After the 7R jackpot game ends, the display mode of the display screen 7a becomes the mode shown in FIG. 54(i2) in a short time (5000 ms in this example). The display mode shown in FIG. 54 (i2) is a display mode when performing a normal variable effect, that is, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are largely displayed substantially in the center of the screen to perform a performance symbol variation game effect. It is a display mode when performing. In addition, when the 7R 5th jackpot hits, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a low base state. , as shown in FIG. 54(i2), a launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters "left shot" and the symbol indicating "left direction") instructing the player to shoot left is displayed near the center of the screen.

The above is the basic flow of the VS chance presentation executed in the case of the 7R big hit. In addition, although the possibility is low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends is "low probability state and time saving state (low probability high base state)". Become. In this case, in the VS chance presentation, the friendly character defeat presentation shown in FIG. 54(h2) is displayed as the end of the confrontation scene (showdown presentation). Then, the ending time specified based on the ending command transmitted from the main control board 80 at the end of the jackpot game is 8000 ms (8 seconds). Also, although the possibility is low, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 7R fifth jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes "high probability state and non-time saving state (high probability low base state)". .

As described above, by performing a series of "VS chance production (specific production)" from the end of the variable display of the special symbols related to the 7R jackpot to the end of the 7R jackpot game, the player can enjoy the start of the jackpot game and V. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the start of a round, it becomes difficult to determine (perceive) whether or not a game ball will pass through the specific area 39, and as a result, the gaming machine equipped with the V-round can improve the game interest. It is possible to plan That is, the introductory effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the middle of the variable display of the special symbol related to the 7R big hit, and after the start of the introductory effect, the 7R from the end of the variable display of the special symbol (stop display). While the game situation changes to the start of a jackpot game and the start of a V-round, the introduction performance is not terminated or the background image related to the introduction performance is changed at the timing of the situation change. This makes it difficult to recognize the start of the jackpot game or the start of the V round, and by extension, it becomes difficult to determine (see through) whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round.

In addition, in the VS chance production, the confrontation production performed through the selection production after the introduction production has the same mode as the confrontation reach production performed during the variable display of the special symbols, so it is started during the variable display of the special symbols. The special game includes an introductory performance continuously performed during the big win game (during the 7R jackpot game in the first embodiment), a selection performance continuously performed after the introduction performance, and a confrontation performance continuously performed after the selection performance. Although it is in the middle, it is possible to express it as a "series of effects" (development effect as a variable effect) related to the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to recognize the start of a big hit game or the start of a V round, and by extension, it is possible to further determine the possibility or presence of passage of a game ball to the specific area 39 in a V round. It can be made difficult.

Also, the aspect of the confrontation effect in the VS chance effect is the same as the confrontation ready-to-reach effect as the variable effect, and the number of effect modes is the same (four types in the first embodiment). Moreover, the image data used in the showdown ready-to-win production is diverted to the showdown production in the 7R big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the confrontation effect during the 7R jackpot game without increasing the image data (data amount). In addition to this, for each of a plurality of confrontation effects that can be executed in the VS chance production, a production mode showing the ending corresponding to the V passing and a production mode corresponding to the V not passing are provided, so that the confrontation can also be performed in this way. It is possible to increase the variation of production. For these reasons, it is possible to increase the effect of the VS chance effect performed at the time of the 7R big hit, and to make the player's consciousness toward the effect developed on the display screen 7a as much as possible. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 in the round.

Also, after starting the VS chance production, when performing the design confirmation production based on the stop display of the special design, that is, the design performed during the execution of the introduction production started at the end of the variable display of the special design related to the 7R big hit. Since the fixed effect is performed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special symbols are stopped and the 7R jackpot game has started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the start timing of the V round. In addition, the ``VS chance production'' consisting of three productions (production scenes), ``introduction production (introduction scene)'', ``selection production (selection scene)'', and ``confrontation production (confrontation scene)'', is performed, so 7R Combined with the difficulty of recognizing the pattern finalizing performance related to the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that the big win has occurred. As a result, it is possible to effectively improve the amusement of the 7R jackpot game including the chance round. In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fifth big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game becomes a low probability low base state, but "VS chance production" and "recognition of symbol confirmation production". "Difficulty" makes it possible to lessen the impression of a big hit, so it is possible to reduce disappointment when the game state changes to a low-probability-low base state after the chance round.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the VS chance production is started from the middle (final stage) of the variable display of the special symbols, a round game (for example, the second round) that is performed relatively early among the multiple round games that constitute the jackpot game ) as V rounds, and the remaining round games (for example, the third and subsequent rounds) can be positioned as rounds for announcing the results of the V rounds. Then, during the period from the middle of the variable display of the special symbols (final stage) to the end of the V round, a production time is secured for the production to inform the start and execution of the V round (chance round). During the period from the end of the V round to the end of the remaining round game, it is possible to secure performance time for performing result notification performance or the like. As a result, it is possible to perform the V round at an early stage and spend the period for the result notification effect of the V round until the remaining round game is finished. In this case, the longer the period until the end of the remaining round game is, the more the performance time for the result notification effect can be obtained. It is desirable to make the execution period of the round game as long as possible.

In addition, in the round game after the 3rd round (3rd round to 7th round) of the 7R jackpot game with VS chance production, a confrontation production indicating whether or not the game ball passed through the specific area 39 in the previous V round is performed, and the production mode of the confrontation production itself is a mode according to the result of the previous V round. In addition, the image control board 100 receives the V passing effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passing effect designation command (S4420) from the sub control board 90, and the confrontation effect is performed based on the received command. and the result of the previous V round do not become inconsistent. From these things, in the remaining round game after the end of the V round, it is possible to perform a highly interesting production that is consistent with the result of the previous V round, and the production performed in the remaining round game (this For example, it is possible to enhance the production effect by the confrontation production).

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in the special electric accessory process of FIG. 32, the big winning opening closing process (S2115) is executed at the end of each round constituting the big hit game. Then, the next round is not started until the big winning opening closing process for each round is finished (completed). Specifically, the processing of S2115 and S2116 in FIG. 32 is performed. According to the processing of the first embodiment, processing related to each round (large winning opening closing processing), for example, interval period setting processing, input/discharge number match determination processing, retry operation processing, and error notification processing can be performed. Confirming completion and starting the next round allows each round to run properly and reliably. Also, if there is a problem in a given round, it will be possible to take measures such as resolving the problem without moving to the next round, and start the next round with the problem resolved. .

By controlling in this way, although there is an advantage that each round can be properly ended and the next round can be properly started, the start time of the next round is delayed, and the progress of the jackpot game is delayed. I have a problem with being late. In order to solve this, in the jackpot game of the second embodiment, a large winning opening that is opened in the previous round (becomes in a state where a ball can be entered) and a big winning opening that is opened in the subsequent round (becomes in a state where a ball can be entered) And, if different, at least a part of the big winning opening closing processing (internal period setting processing, input/output match determination processing, retry operation processing, error notification processing) related to the previous round is performed in the subsequent round. It is supposed to run in parallel. As a result, the standby time set between rounds until the start of the next round is shortened as much as possible, and the big win game can be progressed quickly and smoothly.

Here, of course, "executing at least a part of the large winning opening closing process related to the previous round in parallel with the subsequent round" means that all of these processes (interval period setting process, entry/exit match determination process , retry operation processing, and error notification processing) may be executable in parallel with the subsequent rounds, or one or more of these processing may be executable in parallel with the subsequent rounds. Incidentally, the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of rounds (round game), and either the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened for each round (becomes in a ball-enterable state). It is assumed. Also, the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) that are opened in the round are opened in a predetermined opening/closing pattern determined for each round.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)]
Next, using FIGS. 55 to 60, the special electric auditors processing (jackpot game) of the second embodiment will be described. Other control processing, board structure, and the like are the same as those in the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted. Also, since S2151 to S2155 of the special electric auditors process (S1108) of the second embodiment are the same as the special electric auditors process of the first embodiment, the description is omitted. Next, in S2155, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2155), the first big winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2156), and then the second big winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2157). ), and shifts to the processing of S2158. Here, although the details will be described later, the closing process of the first big winning opening (S2156) means that when a round for opening the first big winning opening 30 is executed in the jackpot game, all the opening and closing operations of the round are executed. This is a process (also called "confirmation process") that is executed after the round ends (after the round ends). Similarly, the second big winning hole closing process (S2157) means that when a round for opening the second big winning hole 35 is executed in the jackpot game, after all the opening and closing operations of the round are completed ( This is a process (also called "confirmation process") to be executed after the end of the round.

If it is determined in S2158 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2158), the process proceeds to S2159. The processing from S2159 to S2163 is the same as the special electric accessary product processing of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted. Also, in S2155, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2155), the process proceeds to S2171. The processing of S2171 to S2175 is also the same as the special electric accessary product processing of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted.

If it is determined in S2158 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2158), the process proceeds to S2164. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of the first round, during the round, or during the large winning opening closing process described later (during the first big winning opening closing process or the second 2 major winning opening closed processing) can be mentioned. In S2164, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing operation is in progress, that is, whether or not the predetermined large winning opening opening pattern started in S2160 is being executed (during the round) (S2164). In S2164, when it is determined that the operation of opening and closing the big prize opening is being executed (during the round) (YES in S2164), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the round being executed is met (S2165). If it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2165), the process ends. Note that the round end conditions are the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2165), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2166), and the process proceeds to S2167. In S2166, a round end command capable of specifying the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" if the first round is ended, and "2R end command" if the second round is ended. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output process of S201.

At S2164, when it is determined that the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening is not being executed (during the round) (NO at S2164), the process proceeds to S2170. In S2167, it is determined whether or not the first big winning opening opening round has ended, that is, whether or not the big winning opening opened in the finished round is the first big winning opening 30 (S2167). In S2167, when it is determined that the big winning hole opened in the finished round is the first big winning hole (YES in S2167), the closing processing of the big winning hole related to the first big winning hole (that is, the first big winning hole In order to execute the mouth closing process (S2156)), the first closing process flag is turned ON (S2168), and the process proceeds to S2170. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2167 that the big winning hole opened in the finished round is not the first big winning hole, that is, the big winning hole opened in the finished round is the second big winning hole (in S2167 NO), the second closing process flag is set to ON (S2169) in order to execute the closing process of the second big winning opening (that is, the closing process of the second big winning opening (S2157)), and the process of S2170 is started. Transition. In S2170, a round counter subtraction process, which will be described later, is performed (S2170), and the process ends.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the first big winning opening closing process (also referred to as "confirmation process" or "first confirmation process") of the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, as the big winning opening closing process, the big winning opening closing process for either the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is performed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, it is possible to open the second big winning opening during execution of the first big winning opening closing process, and to open the first big winning opening during execution of the second big winning opening closing process. enables operation. Therefore, in the second big winning opening closing process, depending on the situation, the first big winning opening closing process and the second big winning opening closing process may be executed in parallel. It's becoming

In the first big winning opening closing process (S2156), first, in S3001, it is determined whether or not the first closing process flag is ON (S3001), and if it is determined that the first closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3001), The process ends without performing the big winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the first closing process flag is ON (YES in S3001), then it is determined whether it is time to start the interval period (S3002). If it is determined in S3002 that it is time to start the interval period (YES in S3002), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3004. If it is determined in S3002 that it is not the time to start the interval period, that is, that the interval period is already being executed (measured) (NO in S3002), the process proceeds to S3004.

In S3004, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the interval period (S3004), and if it is determined that it is time to end the interval period (YES in S3004), the first closing process flag is turned OFF (S3005), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that it is not the end time of the interval period, i.e., the interval period is still being executed (during measurement) (NO in S3004), the continuation state of not completing the first big winning hole closing process remains. Terminate the process (without completing it). Here, the first big winning hole 30 does not include a specific area 39 (specific area detection sensor 39a) or a movable piece 150 that changes the possibility of guiding a game ball to the specific area, and does not include a ball entering ( or discharge) is provided only with the first big prize winning opening sensor 30a. Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging inside the big winning opening is low, and processing such as error notification based on the input/emission number match determination process, retry operation, and input/emission number mismatch determination process is not executed. That is, in the big winning opening closing process (first big winning opening closing process) related to the round to open the first big winning opening 30, the interval period setting process is performed, and the big winning opening related to the round to open the second big winning opening 35 is performed. Other big winning opening closing processing that can be executed in the winning opening closing processing (second big winning opening closing processing) is not executed. It should be noted that a sensor for detecting an incoming ball and a sensor for detecting an ejected ball may be separately provided for the first big winning hole 30 as well.

[Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the second big winning opening closing process (also referred to as "confirmation process" or "second confirmation process") of the second embodiment will be described. Inside the second big winning hole 35, there is a second big winning hole sensor for detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35, and a second big winning hole sensor for detecting discharge of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35. The non-specific area sensor 49a and the specific area sensor 39a, the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is guided to either the non-specific area (non-specific area sensor 49a) or the specific area (specific area sensor 39a) A movable piece 150 is provided. Therefore, in the round in which the second big prize opening is opened, especially in the round in which the movable piece 150 is operated in a predetermined manner in which the second big prize opening is opened, the possibility of occurrence of clogged balls or the like increases. In the second big winning opening closing process related to the round, a process (confirmation process) different from the first big winning opening closing process is executed.

Specifically, in the second big winning opening closing process (S2157), it is first determined whether the second closing process flag is ON (S3051), and if it is determined that the second closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3051). , the process ends without performing the big winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the second closing process flag is ON (YES in S3051), then it is determined whether it is time to start the interval period (S3052). If it is determined in S3052 that it is time to start the interval period (YES in S3052), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3053), and the process proceeds to S3054. If it is determined in S3052 that it is not the time to start the interval period (NO in S3052), the process proceeds to S3054. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the interval period, the interval period is already being executed (during measurement), the interval period is over and the retry operation is not being executed, or the retry operation is being executed. It is possible to cite a case where it is in progress, a case where it is after the retry operation is completed and before execution of error notification, and a case where error notification is being executed.

In S3054, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (S3054), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measuring is in progress) (NO in S3054), process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S3054), the process proceeds to S3055. The processing from S3055 to S3059 is the same as the processing from S2705 to S2709 of the big winning opening closing processing of the first embodiment, so the explanation is omitted.

[Incoming/ejecting number match determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the input/discharge number matching determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the entering/ejecting number match determination process (S3059) is not performed in the first big winning opening closing process, but only in the second big winning opening closing process. Therefore, the closing process flag that is turned off in S2854 and S2862 is the second closing process flag. This corresponds to the processes of S2804 and S2812 of the input/discharge number match determination process (S2708) of the first embodiment. Other processes of the input/discharge number matching determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment are the same as those of the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

[Round counter subtraction processing]
Next, the round counter subtraction process (S2170) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed after the round end condition is met, that is, after all the opening actions in the round are completed. By this process, if the closing process of closing the first big winning slot related to the previous round to open the first big winning slot is completed, it is possible to execute the next round to open the first big winning slot. . Conversely, if the closing process for closing the first big winning slot related to the previous round to open the first big winning slot has not been completed, it is impossible to execute (start) the next round to open the first big winning slot. and Similarly, if the closing processing of the second big winning opening related to the previous round for opening the second big winning opening has been completed, the execution of the next round for opening the second big winning opening is possible. Conversely, if the closing process for closing the second big winning slot related to the previous round to open the second big winning slot has not been completed, it is impossible to execute (start) the next round to open the second big winning slot. and

Therefore, for example, the closing processing of the second big winning opening related to the round (for example, the second round) for opening the second big winning opening and the next round (for example, the third round) for opening the first big winning opening and the opening operation can be executed in parallel. However, as long as the second big winning hole closing process related to the round (for example, the second round) for opening the second big winning hole is not completed, the next round (for example, the 4th round) to open the second big winning hole second). In addition, although it is not set in the round execution pattern in the big hit game of the present embodiment, if the next round (for example, the fourth round) is a round that opens the first big winning hole, the previous ( The next round (for example, the fourth round) may be executed (started) on the condition that the first big winning hole closing process of the third round) is completed. Of course, it does not matter in which round the big winning hole is opened, and it is also possible not to proceed to the next round. That is, the number of rounds that can be executed in parallel with the predetermined big winning opening closing process may be set to only one round.

Specifically, in the round counter subtraction process (S2170), first, it is determined whether or not the next round is the round for opening the first big winning hole (S2901). In S2901, if it is determined that the next round is the round to open the first big prize hole (YES in S2901), then it is determined whether or not the first closing processing flag is OFF (S2902). If it is determined that the closing processing flag is not OFF, that is, the first big winning opening closing processing has not been completed yet (NO in S2902), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2902), the process proceeds to S2907.

Also, in S2901, if it is determined that the next round is not the round to open the first big prize gate (NO in S2901), then it is determined whether the next round is the round to open the second big prize gate ( S2903). In S2903, if it is determined that the next round is the round to open the second big prize opening (YES in S2903), then it is determined whether the second closing processing flag is OFF (S2904), and in S2904 If it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not OFF (NO in S2904), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2904 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2904), the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, in S2904, when it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not OFF, that is, the closing processing of the second large winning opening is not completed, the round that ended this time is the round that opens the second large winning opening. There is a case where the closing process of the second big winning opening has not yet been completed. That is, this is the case where the rounds for opening the second big prize hole are executed continuously. Next, although the round that ended this time is the round that opens the first big prize hole, the closing processing of the second big prize hole related to the previous round that opens the second big prize hole is not finished. A case can be mentioned.

This is because in the second big prize winning opening closing process related to the previous round in which the second big winning opening is opened, it is determined that the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls do not match in the matching determination process of the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls, and the retry operation process is performed. (also referred to as "movable member operation processing"), or an error notification process may be performed when a match is not determined even if a retry operation is performed. In such a case, the round (opening operation) for opening the next second big winning hole is not executed (not started) until the second big winning hole closing process is completed. If the match determination process is repeated for a predetermined period of time and the match determination is not made, the second big winning opening closing process is completed when the predetermined error notification period elapses.

Also, in S2903, if it is determined that the next round is not the round that opens the second big winning hole, that is, it is the final round in the jackpot game (NO in S2903), then it is checked whether the first closing processing flag is OFF. Judge (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the second closing process flag is OFF (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2906), the process proceeds to S2907. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2905) and if it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2906), the process ends. In other words, when all the opening operations of the final round have been completed, it is confirmed that both the first and second large winning opening closing processes have been completed, and the process proceeds to S2907. In addition, since the processing of S2907 to S2911 is the same as the processing of S2117 to S2121 of the special electric accessary product processing of the first embodiment, the description is omitted.

[Timing chart]
Also, FIG. 60 shows a timing chart showing an embodiment of a predetermined round in the jackpot game of the second embodiment. In this timing chart, for the sake of convenience, the number of entering balls and the number of ejecting balls do not match in the matching process of the number of entering and discharging in the closing process of the second big prize opening related to the second round, and then the match determination process is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Even if they do not match, a retry operation is performed and an error notification is performed. While executing the second big winning hole closing process, in parallel with the second big winning hole closing process, 3 rounds of opening the first big winning hole different from the second round. 2 shows how the eyes are performed.

As shown in this timing chart, in the present embodiment 2, the closing process of the second big winning opening related to the previous round, that is, the interval period setting process, the retry operation process, the error notification process, and the processes set between them The waiting period, etc., and the opening operation of the next round (third round) can be executed in parallel. Further, in the second embodiment, in addition to this, the operation of the movable piece 150 (opening and closing operation of the specific area) in the previous round (second round) and the opening operation in the next round (third round) are performed in parallel. and executable.

In addition, the opening operation of the previous round and the opening operation of the subsequent round (opening operation of the first big winning slot and opening operation of the second big winning slot) are controlled so as not to be performed redundantly. However, as shown in FIG. 60, depending on the situation, the operation of the movable piece 150 (opening/closing operation of the specific area) continues even after all the opening operations of the previous round (second round) are completed (see FIG. 60). 2000 ms shown in 60). In addition, the specific area sensor 39a is also set as an effective period as an extra period during the duration period and a predetermined period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60) after the duration period ends. That is, the valid period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) of the second large winning opening in the previous round, and the game ball detection sensor (first large winning opening sensor 30a) of the first large winning opening in the next round. may overlap with the validity period of It should be noted that "the specific area sensor 39a is also set to the valid period for the continuation period and the predetermined period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60) after the continuation period ends", but similarly, the non-specific area sensor 49a It is said that After all the opening operations are completed, the ball will not enter the second big winning hole 35, so the second big winning hole sensor 35a may have an invalid period or an effective period. In addition, the valid period or invalid period is about whether to validate or invalidate the provision of benefits when passing through a specific area, and regarding the game ball detection function (discharge detection function), , at least until the end of the error annunciation period. As a result, even when a game ball is detected during the invalid period, it is possible to determine a match in the input/discharge number match determination process.

In this way, the closing process of the big winning slot related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel, or the operation of the movable piece related to the previous round (opening/closing operation of the specific area) and the next round are performed. The opening operation of the round is executed in parallel, or the valid period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel. made it possible to This allowed us to start the next round quickly. Also, if there is a discrepancy between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in the process of closing the big winning slot, etc., the match determination process, the retry operation process, and the error notification process, which are repeatedly executed, are performed in parallel with the next round. As a result, the big win game can be quickly and smoothly executed without delaying the progress of the round. Further, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment as well, the input/discharge number match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. , it is possible to complete the big winning opening closing process.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment differs from the other embodiments in the processing related to the execution of the VS chance effect (specific effect). In the following, mainly different parts from the contents explained in the first embodiment will be explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, there are four types of confrontation A to D with respect to the confrontation production (confrontation scene) in the VS chance production, and which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed is determined by VS. It was decided when starting the chance production. That is, based on the specific effect pattern selected and set in the process of S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. It was Then, according to the V pass effect designation command or V non-pass effect designation command received in S4418 or S4420 of the received command analysis process (S4301) shown in FIG. It was a thing. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed is not determined when starting the VS chance production, but at the second round of the 7R jackpot game, that is, at the timing when the V round ends. , which one of the confrontations A to D is to be executed, and whether the confrontation effect to be executed is the victory pattern of the ally character (ally character victory effect) or the defeat pattern (ally character defeat effect). I am assuming.

Specifically, in Example 3, first, in S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. 53(b) to (d) and "selection effect 1" shown in FIG. 53(e) are set. After that, a specific effect start command for starting the VS chance effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the set specific effect start command is transmitted by command transmission processing (S4006). When the information is transmitted to the image control board 100, the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53(b) is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Thereafter, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game is completed, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effects (introduction effect 2 to selection effect 1) of FIGS. is done. Then, when the second round of the 7R jackpot game ends, it is determined which one of the confrontations A to D will be the confrontation effect to be executed this time. After showing the result (selection effect 2), a confrontation effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 54(g) to (h1) and (h2)). The determination and execution of this confrontation effect are realized by the received command analysis process of the second embodiment performed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub control unit 90). Received command analysis processing according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the received command analysis processing of the third embodiment is the processing shown in FIG. Since S4395 to S4411 in FIG. 43 and S4412, S4413 and S4414 to S4416 in FIG. 44 are the same as in the third embodiment, they are omitted here. In addition, in FIG. 61, the same step numbers as in the first embodiment are assigned to the processing contents common to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the received command analysis process of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not a round end command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4450). ), the process proceeds to S4414, and if it is determined that the data has been received (YES in S4450), it is determined whether or not the number of completed rounds is 2 (S4451). The round end command sent from the main control board 80 contains information that can specify the number of the round to end (end round), similar to the above-described round start command. , the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the round number of the end round based on the received round end command. If it is determined that the number of completed rounds is not the second round (NO in S4451), the process ends. Here, in the third embodiment, when a round end command is received from the main control board 80, a command indicating how many rounds have been completed is transmitted to the image control board 100 in response to this command. is configured to not be performed. This is because the CPU of the image control board 100 can specify the current number of rounds by transmitting a round designation command to the image control board 100 at least by the process of S4415, regardless of the type of the big win. This is because it is possible to grasp the progress of the game, or to execute the effect when performing the effect according to the progress of the jackpot game. Of course, in the same manner as when the round start command is received from the main control board 80, based on the reception of the round end command, a command specifying the number of end rounds is transmitted to the image control board 100, and the effect display etc. corresponding to it is transmitted. You can do it.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4451 that two rounds have been completed (YES in S4451), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON (S4452), and if it is determined that it is ON. (YES in S4452), it means that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 in the V round (V passage). is set (S4453), the V passage flag is turned OFF (S4454), and the process proceeds to S4455. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passage flag is not ON (it is OFF) in S4452 (NO in S4452), it means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, a table (V non-passing confrontation effect pattern determination table) is set to determine the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the non-passing (S4457), and the process proceeds to S4455. In the third embodiment, the random number for determining the confrontation effect (random number range: 0 to 99) is provided as the random number for determining various effects acquired in S4501 of FIG. Based on the effect determination random number and the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, a confrontation effect pattern corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is selected and set (S4455).

Here, the confrontation effect pattern determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the confrontation effect pattern determination table includes a table for passing V and a table for not passing V. In each table, each of confrontations A to D and a random value for determining confrontation effect are stored. It defines correspondence. Each production pattern of confrontation A to D corresponding to V passage is that the production mode from the start to the end (ending) of the confrontation scene is the victory of the ally character (victory pattern), and it is possible to not pass V. Each of the corresponding production patterns of confrontation A to D is such that the friendly character is defeated (defeat pattern) from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene. In the third embodiment, the selection rate (appearance rate) is made different between the battles A to D corresponding to passing V and the battles A to D corresponding to not passing V, respectively. Specifically, as the confrontation effect pattern selected in the case of passing V, the selection rate of confrontation D (50%) is the highest, followed by confrontation C (30%), confrontation B (15%), confrontation A (5%), the selectivity is lower. On the other hand, as the confrontation effect pattern selected when V has not passed, the selection rate of confrontation A (50%) is the highest, followed by confrontation B (30%), confrontation C (15%), confrontation D (5%). %), the selectivity decreases. Thus, for example, when the showdown D is selected as the showdown production pattern and the showdown production of the showdown D is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V increases, and the showdown A is selected as the showdown production pattern. Depending on the type of the confrontation production, the game state after the jackpot game is "probable variable game state ( probability variation mode)”, that is, it is possible to vary the reliability (expectation) of probability variation (V passage). In the present embodiment 3, for all of the production patterns of confrontation A to D, the selection rate is different between the case of passing V and the case of not passing V, but the case of passing V and not passing V The confrontation effect pattern determination table may include those having the same selection rate as in the case of . In this way, for the player, is the possibility of passing V in this big hit high or low, that is, is there a high possibility that the game state after the end of the big win game will be "probability variable game state (probability variable mode)"? It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to guess whether it is low or not, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In S4455, a confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for confrontation effect determination acquired in S4501 is selected from the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, and the selected confrontation effect pattern is set. . Next, in S4456, the confrontation effect designation command indicating the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4456). When the set confrontation effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 generates the confrontation effect specified based on the received confrontation effect designation command. Any one of A to D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the confrontation effect to be executed this time. At this time, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the selection effect 1 (roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53(e) to the selection effect 2 (roulette effect result display) shown in FIG. 53(f). . The switching display from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 is performed after the end of the 2nd round until the start of the 3rd round, that is, in the interval period between the 2nd round and the 3rd round.

After that, in accordance with the start of the third round (YES in S4414->S4415->YES in S4416), a confrontation effect start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in S4458 (S4458). When the set confrontation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the selection effect 2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The type of confrontation effect set (any one of confrontation A to D), that is, the confrontation scene based on the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is displayed (see FIG. 54). After that, the CPU of the image control board 100 receives various commands such as a round start command and a round end command from the sub-control board 90, and until the current jackpot game (7R jackpot game) ends, that is, the final round. is completed, the ending of the confrontation production (friend character victory production or ally character defeat production) based on the current confrontation production pattern is displayed.

In the configuration of the third embodiment, after the result of the V round, that is, the V pass or the V non-pass in the V round is determined, based on the result, the confrontation production (confrontation) is performed in the VS chance production. Scene) effect pattern (one of the confrontation A to D) is determined, so it is possible to set the reliability of the probability variation (V pass) in the confrontation effect. As a result, before the end of the V-round, a plurality of production patterns (confrontation A to D) of the confrontation production that can be selected are displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby preventing the selection of a highly reliable production production. It is possible to arouse the player's expectations. As a result, it is possible to improve the game interest when the VS chance production is performed, especially the game interest from the selection production to the confrontation production.

In the third embodiment, the selection (determination) of the confrontation effect pattern is performed after the 2nd round (V round) of the 7R jackpot game is completed, specifically, between the 2nd round and the 3rd round (interval period). However, the timing for selecting the confrontation effect pattern is not limited to this. That is, at least after the result of the V round (V pass/V non-pass) is determined, it is possible to appropriately select the confrontation effect pattern. Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, the movable piece 150 is in the operating state ( The specific area is open), then the non-operating state (specific area closed), and then the operating state (specific area open) again. The operation mode of this movable piece 150 is, for example, the operating state (specific area open) 80 ms after the initial opening of the V attacker (16000 ms opening start), the state is maintained for 5000 ms, and the non-operating state ( Specific area closed), if it is prevented from entering the operating state after that, the operation control of the movable piece 150 ends before the first opening of the V attacker (opening of 16000 ms) ends, and after that, the game ball is specified The possibility of passing through region 39 is eliminated. In this case, the result of the V round (V pass / V non-pass) is confirmed before the V round (2 rounds) ends, and the time from the confirmation point to the start of the next round is related to the determination and selection of the confrontation production pattern. It becomes possible to use it as the execution time of the effect (selected effect). Alternatively, among the remaining rounds after the end of the second round (V round), at least the final round (7 rounds in the embodiment) is selected (determined) in any one of the rounds, and the selection is made. It is also possible to perform an effect based on the (decision) result (an effect indicating the selection result, a confrontation effect (result notification effect) based on the selection result, etc.).

Also, a case may be provided in which the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round. Even in this case, the result of the V round (V pass / V non-pass) is confirmed before the end of the V round (2 rounds), and the time from the confirmation point to the start of the next round is determined or selected for the confrontation production pattern. It is possible to use it as the execution time of the production (for example, selection production) related to. In addition, when the confrontation performance pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the selection timing of the confrontation performance pattern may be earlier or later depending on the passage timing. It is also possible to change the effect mode of the effect (selected effect) related to the determination and selection of the effect pattern. By doing this, for example, in the case of V passage, the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) is displayed at an earlier timing than the case of V non-passage, or the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) is displayed. It is possible to provide an effect mode suggesting the confirmation of V passage in advance, such as performing an advance notice effect indicating the confirmation of V passage at the stage of . It is desirable to set such an effect mode as a so-called "premium effect". With respect to these "timings for selecting (determining) the confrontation production pattern", any one timing may be fixedly set, or a random number lottery triggered by winning a big win or starting a big win game, etc., or a big win. The selection (decision) timing may be determined each time based on various conditions such as the type of symbol.

Although Examples 1 to 3 have been described above, the present invention is not limited to them. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode of the pattern confirmation effect (fourth effect) when the effect symbol 8 is stopped (confirmed display) during the execution of the VS chance (introduction effect) related to the 7R big hit is changed to the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 7a with the display size smaller than usual, the fixed display time is set to a short time (500 ms), and with the passage of the fixed display time (transition from the introduction effect 2 to the introduction effect 3) By making the mode of erasing the performance pattern 8 from the display screen 7a, it is made difficult to recognize the design determination performance, but the mode of making the design determination performance difficult to recognize is not limited to the embodiment. . For example, the fixed display time of the production pattern 8 can be further shortened, the color of the production pattern 8 can be made lighter than usual or translucent, the number of digits (number) of the production pattern 8 can be reduced, or the production pattern 8 can be is changed to a symbol or figure that is more difficult to recognize than a number, etc., and the design confirmation effect is difficult to recognize depending on each element such as the display size, confirmation display time, display position, type, content, shape, etc. of the production pattern 8 Aspects are possible.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, for the production patterns of "introduction production" and "selection production" that constitute the VS chance production (specific production), production scenes (selection production 2) showing the selection results of confrontation A to D are shown. Although the description has been given assuming that there is one effect pattern, a plurality of effect patterns are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 for the "introduction effect" and the "selection effect", and the image data related to them are stored in the image control board. 100 ROM (image ROM), one or both of the "introduction effect" and "selected effect" are selected at the start of the VS chance effect, and the selected effect pattern is selected. The "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" may be performed based on. For example, depending on the effect pattern, the character image that appears in the introductory effect may differ, the background image in the introductory effect and the selection effect may differ, and the mode of the selection effect may differ (for example, roulette effect, darts effect, etc.). It is possible to provide a production pattern of. This makes it possible to diversify the specific effects. In addition, regarding the "showdown effect" that constitutes the VS chance effect (specific effect), in the above-described embodiment, the confrontation effect (showdown scene) was started with the start of the third round. It is not necessary to start the confrontation effect with the start. For example, the selection effect described above may be performed even after the start of the third round, and then the confrontation effect may be started. In other words, the start timing of the confrontation effect may be a predetermined time after the result of the previous V round is determined. It may be at a predetermined time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the 1st and 2nd rounds (V round) of the "7R 4th big win" and the 1st round of the "7R 5th big win" are the second big prize openings. 35 (V-attacker) are opened and closed in the same manner, and these rounds are made to be recognized by the player as one "chance round". It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the "5th big wins" has occurred. And in the 7R 4th jackpot, when the interval period after the second and subsequent openings of the V attacker ends, the 3rd round proceeds, while in the 7R 5th jackpot, the interval after the second and subsequent openings of the V attacker When the period ends, the game advances to round 2 (V round), in which the V attacker is released for a short period of time (100 ms), and then to round 3 (see FIG. 49). For this reason, before the end of the "chance round", the opening and closing motions of the V-attacker are the same between the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot", but after that, when proceeding to the 3rd round, The V-attacker has a slightly different opening/closing operation mode, and the opening/closing operation modes of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds are not completely the same.

On the other hand, by completely matching the opening and closing operation modes of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds between the ``7R 4th jackpot'' and the ``7R 5th jackpot'', the ``7R 4th jackpot'' and the 7R 5th jackpot It is also possible to make it more difficult to distinguish "big hit". Specifically, for example, among the opening patterns shown in FIG. 49, the final opening of the V attacker in the second round of the "7R 4th jackpot" is performed with an opening time of 100 ms (0.1 seconds) (momentary opening and closing). By performing the final opening of the V attacker in the 1st round of the "7R 5th big hit" with an opening time of 100 ms (0.1 seconds) (momentary opening and closing) as one opening in the 2nd round , the opening and closing operation modes of the V-attacker can be completely matched. As a result, it becomes extremely difficult to determine which of the "7R 4th big win" and "7R 5th big win" has occurred through the opening/closing operation mode of the V-attacker. Also in this case, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 until the end of the second round (until the start of the third round), as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the "7R fourth big win" or "7R fifth big win" has occurred even through the performance display. As a result, at least until the end of the second round (until the start of the third round), it is extremely difficult to discriminate (see through) whether or not the game ball will pass through the specific area 39. becomes.

However, as in the above-described embodiment, the opening and closing operation of the V attacker in the 1st round and the 2nd round is not completely matched between the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot". By making the opening and closing operation of the V attacker slightly different when proceeding to , it is difficult to determine which of the "7R 4th big hit" and "7R 5th big hit" has occurred, but the 3rd round starts from the end of the chance round. By paying close attention to the opening and closing behavior of the V-attacker, it is possible to distinguish between them. By deliberately leaving such a margin for discrimination, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of seeing through, although it is difficult to discriminate the type of the 7R big hit and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39. becomes. Regarding the match/disagreement of the opening/closing operation modes of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds, not only the 7R jackpot, but also the "12R 2nd and 3rd jackpots" and the "2R 7th and 8th jackpots" in the above-described embodiment. (“V-passed scheduled jackpot” and “V-not-passed scheduled jackpot” having the same number of rounds).

Also, in the above-described embodiment, a big hit and a miss are provided as a result of the determination of whether the special symbol is right or wrong, but in addition to this, a "small hit" may be provided. However, the opening time when the big winning opening is opened in the special game (small winning game) related to the small winning is not the long time (eg 30 seconds) like the big winning, but the short time (eg 1.8 seconds). . When such a small win is provided, for example, a "2R big win" is provided as a win to open the big winning hole twice in 0.9 seconds, and a distinction (discrimination) between the "small win" and the "2R big win" is provided. By making the 2R jackpot difficult to hit and making the 2R jackpot the above-mentioned "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", it is possible to obtain a so-called "latent probability variable" game property. Further, when performing a small winning game to open the second big winning hole 35, the movable piece 150 is not operated during the small winning game. That is, during the small winning game, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39, and the high probability state is not given based on the occurrence of the small winning.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effective period of the specific area 39 is defined as the period during which the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is being executed and the specific area is in the open state, and 1000 ms after the open state is changed to the closed state. and the period of , but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, during execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern, the entire period may be set as the valid period, or during execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern, the entire period after the first opening state may be set as the valid period. , or in addition, a predetermined period after the end of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern may be set as the valid period.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, except for the 15R big hit, the V attacker ( 1st round of a jackpot game related to the opening pattern (including the interval period between rounds) of the second jackpot 35) and the planned jackpots not passed through V (12R 3rd jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot, 2R 8th jackpot) The opening pattern of the V attacker is the same pattern, and the first and second rounds of V-passing scheduled big wins and the first round of V-not-passing scheduled big wins are difficult to distinguish from the appearance. In other words, just by looking at the opening and closing operation of the V attacker when the chance round is started, it is difficult to tell whether the chance round is due to a V-passing planned jackpot (for example, the 7R 4th jackpot) or a V not-passing planned jackpot (for example, the 7R th jackpot). It was difficult to determine whether it was due to the 5 jackpot). Regarding the number of rounds that make up this chance round, in the above-described embodiment, a total of two rounds, the first round and the second round, were used as chance rounds, but the number of rounds is limited to two rounds, such as three rounds or four rounds. not a thing For example, the rounds that make up the chance round are the 1st to 3rd rounds, a total of 3 rounds, the 2nd round of which is the V round (specific round), and the 1st and 3rd rounds are open to the V attacker. A round (non-specific round) in which the movable piece 150 does not operate may be used. In this case, the release pattern of the V attacker in the V round (second round) of the V passage scheduled jackpot (for example, the 7R fourth jackpot) is set to a pattern with a high possibility of entering the game ball (pattern that allows easy ball entry). , the opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round (second round) of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, the 7R fifth jackpot) is a pattern with a low possibility of entering the game ball (a pattern in which it is difficult to enter), and So, V attacker's release pattern (opening and closing operation mode) from the 1st to 3rd rounds of the V scheduled jackpot, and the V attacker's release pattern from the 1st to 3rd rounds of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ( The opening patterns of the V-attackers in the first round and the third round of both jackpots may be set so that the opening and closing operations are the same. In other words, there is a difference in the opening time of the V attacker in the V round between the planned V-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R 4th jackpot) and the planned V non-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R 5th jackpot). The rounds are used to match the opening patterns of the V-attackers, and the opening patterns of the two big-hitting V-attackers are matched. A V-attacker release pattern according to such a configuration (Modification 1) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 63 shows the "7R 4th big hit" as a V planned big hit and the "7R 5th big hit" as a planned V non-passed big hit, the V attacker release operation from the 1st round to the 3rd round according to Modification 1 ( open pattern). In this modified example 1, for both the "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot", the opening patterns of the V attackers in the first and second rounds are the "7R 4th jackpot" and " 7R 5th jackpot", but the 3rd round is different from the above embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the first big winning hole 30 is used as the big winning hole opened in the third round. , and the third round are defined as non-specific rounds (rounds in which the movable piece 15 does not move). Then, the opening pattern of the V-attacker in the 3rd round of the "7R 4th jackpot" is set to 3 rounds with the V-attacker short opening (100ms) in the 2nd round of the "7R 5th jackpot" and the interval period (2000ms). It is a pattern that performs the same opening operation as the opening of the V attacker of the eye. That is, the first V-attacker release in the third round of the "7R 4th big win" is performed in the same manner as the V-attacker release in the second round of the "7R 5th big win", and the 3rd round of the "7R 4th big win". The V-attacker opening for the second and subsequent rounds is performed in the same manner as the opening of the V-attacker in the third round of the "7R fifth big win". In addition, in this modification 1, the opening of the V attacker in the 3rd round of the "7R 5th jackpot" is the same as the opening of the V attacker in the 2nd round of the "7R 4th jackpot" (similar to the above embodiment). It is supposed to be done in That is, after opening the V attacker until 16000ms (16 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round, 1000ms (1 second) of closing is sandwiched between each opening, and 1 opening of 1000ms (1 second), One opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two openings of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in this order.

According to this modification 1, it is possible to completely match the opening and closing motions of the V-attacker from the start of the 1st round to the end of the 3rd round between the "7R 4th big win" and the "7R 5th big win". As a result, it becomes impossible to visually determine which of the "7R fourth big win" and "7R fifth big win" has occurred through the opening and closing operation of the V-attacker. In addition, in the present modification 1, until the third round ends, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing a specific effect (VS chance effect) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, even through the effect display , it is difficult (impossible) to determine which of the "7R 4th big win" and "7R 5th big win" has occurred. When performing the above-mentioned specific effect (VS chance effect) in this modification 1, for example, if the 7R 4th jackpot, the timing of the second V attacker release start in the 3rd round, and if the 7R 5th jackpot, 3 rounds Control (display control) for progressing the specific effect may be performed so that the confrontation effect (result notification effect) shown in FIG. Therefore, even in the present modification 1, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty (difficulty) in determining the 7R jackpot type from both the opening and closing operation mode of the V attacker and the effect display mode, and at least the result of the third round is notified. Until the result of the previous V round (chance round) is shown by the effect, it is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to determine (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 or whether or not it passes. possible).

In Modified Example 1, the V-attacker release pattern for the second and subsequent rounds in the third round of the "7R 4th big win" and the V-attacker release pattern in the 3rd round of the "7R 5th big win" are in the manner described above. There is no particular limitation, and any mode is acceptable as long as it makes it difficult (substantially impossible) to determine the type of the jackpot. Further, in the "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot" of Modification 1, the round game from the 4th round onward may be, for example, the round game from the 3rd round onward in the above-described embodiment, Alternatively, the round game after the fourth round of the above-described embodiment may be performed.

In addition, in the modification 1 shown in FIG. 63, the 1st round and the 3rd round following the 2nd round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and the V passing schedule jackpot (eg 7R 4th jackpot) and V not passing The opening and closing action of the V-attacker in the 1st to 3rd rounds was the same as the scheduled jackpot (for example, the 7R 5th jackpot), but the 1st round was not the 3rd round of the 1st to 3rd rounds. It is also possible to match the mode of the opening and closing motion of the V attacker by using two rounds, the (non-specific round) and the second round (V round). That is, even with the configuration in which the first opening (100 ms opening) in the third round of the 7R fourth big hit shown in the upper part of FIG. can be matched. Specifically, the 100 ms release that exists after the final 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed not as the third round but as the second round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000ms in the third round shown in the upper part of the figure is the interval. . In this way, when the V round is the second round, the setting mode (combination) of the opening pattern of the V attacker in the specific round of the second round and the subsequent non-specific round, the 1st to 3rd rounds In addition to 1st and 2nd rounds, the mode of opening and closing action of the V attacker is made to match between the scheduled V-passing jackpot (eg, 7R 4th jackpot) and the V-not-passing scheduled jackpot (eg, 7R 5th jackpot). becomes possible. By matching the opening and closing motions of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds, it is possible to use the first big prize hole 30 instead of the V-attacker in the 3rd round, and the opening pattern of the V-attacker can be changed. It is possible to widen the range of design of the round game while ensuring that it is difficult to distinguish the type of big hit based on the above.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, including the modification 1, the second round is the V round, but the round to be the V round is not limited to the second round. It does not matter whether It is difficult to determine from the opening/closing operation (opening pattern) of the V-attacker which of the planned V-passing big hit (for example, the 7R 4th big hit) and the V non-passing planned big hit (for example, the 7R 5th big hit) has occurred. If it is possible (substantially impossible), it does not matter what round is the V round. In other words, a configuration in which a non-specific round exists before a specific round (V round), a configuration in which a non-specific round exists after a specific round (V round), or a specific round (V It is possible to adopt various configurations such as a configuration in which non-specific rounds exist before and after the round). Specifically, for example, it is possible to set the third round as the V round or the first round as the V round. If the 3rd round is the V round, for example, the 1st and 2nd rounds of the "7R 4th jackpot" in the above-described embodiment are opened in a short time (for example, 100 ms), and the 3rd round is V attacker release may be performed in the same manner as the 2nd round of the 7R 4th jackpot in the above-described embodiment. Then, the opening and closing motions of the V-attackers in the 1st to 3rd rounds of the "7R 5th big win" may be performed in the same manner as the opening and closing motions of the V-attackers in the 1st to 3rd rounds. In addition, the same specific effect (VS chance effect) as in the above-described embodiment may be performed until the end of the third round. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment.

Alternatively, if the first round is the V round, one round is started with a planned V-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R 4th jackpot) and a V-not-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R 5th jackpot) in the same manner as in Modification 1 described above. It is possible to completely match the opening and closing motions of the V-attackers up to the end of the third round so that the type of the hit that has occurred cannot be determined. The release pattern of the V-attacker according to such a configuration (Modification 2) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 64 shows the "7R 4th jackpot" as the V-passing planned jackpot and the "7R 5th jackpot" as the V-not-passing planned jackpot, the V-attacker release operation from the 1st round to the 3rd round in Modification 2 ( open pattern). Here, in this modification 2, the first round of the jackpot game is V round (specific round), the second and third rounds are non-specific rounds, and the opening of the V attacker in the first round starts (first opening start), the operation control of the movable piece 150 is started. The motion control of the movable piece 15 (the motion pattern of the movable piece 150) is the same as in the above-described embodiment. That is, when 80 ms have passed since the opening of the V attacker in the first round (round start), the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned ON) for 80 ms, and then the non-operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned OFF), When 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) have passed in this state, the operating state (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned ON) is again set, and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) has passed (see FIG. 50). reference).

In addition, in the 7R 4th jackpot (V-passing scheduled jackpot) of Modification 2, as shown in the upper part of FIG. After closing for 2000 ms (2 seconds), let the V-attacker open for 16000 ms (16 seconds) (second opening). After this, the opening and closing operation of the V-attacker is the same as in the above-described embodiment, that is, after the end of opening for 16000 ms (16 seconds), closing for 1000 ms (1 second) is interposed, and opening for 1000 ms (1 second) is performed once. , 4,000 ms (4 seconds) opening once and 1,000 ms (1 second) opening twice, respectively. As described above, in Modification 2, the movable piece 150 is continuously in the operating state after 3000 ms (3 seconds) have passed since the start of the first round. For this reason, in the "V passing scheduled jackpot" of the second modification, after 900 ms have passed since the second V attacker opening (opening of 16000 ms) in the first round was started, that is, after 16000 ms (16 seconds) During 15100 ms (about 15 seconds), the movable piece 150 is in the operating state (the specific area is open), and the game ball hit by the V-attacker can pass through the specific area 39 . Also, after the end of the 1st round, in the 2nd round that takes place after an interval period of 2000ms (2 seconds), the V attacker is released for only 100ms (0.1 seconds), and then an interval period of 2000ms (2 seconds). After that, the 3rd round V attacker is released. The opening of the V-attacker (opening/closing operation) in the third round is performed in the same pattern as the second and subsequent opening/closing operations of the V-attacker in the first round.

On the other hand, in the 7R fifth big win (V non-passing scheduled big win) of Modification 2, as shown in the lower part of FIG. Open for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) to finish the first round. Therefore, in the first round (V round) of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, only the remaining 20 ms of the V attacker's opening time overlaps with the operation period (operation state) of the movable piece 150, and the opening time is 100 ms. Not only is the possibility of the game ball entering the open V-attacker extremely low, but also the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is extremely low. The opening pattern of the V-attacker in the first round is the same as the opening (opening and closing) of the V-attacker for the first time in the first round of the 7R 4th jackpot. Then, when the first round ends, the V attacker is released in the second round after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The V-attacker release pattern in the second round is the same as the V-attacker release (opening/closing) after the second time in the first round of the 7R 4th big win. Therefore, the release pattern of the V-attacker in the first round of the 7R 4th big win and the release pattern of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds of the 7R 5th big win are the same. Also, when the second round ends, an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds) passes, and the third round V attacker is released. The release pattern of the V-attacker in the 3rd round is the same as the release pattern of the V-attacker in the 2nd to 3rd rounds (including the interval period) of the 7R 4th jackpot.

Thus, in the second modification, as is clear from FIG. 64, one round includes the "7R fourth big hit" as the planned V-passing big hit and the "7R fifth big hit" as the V-not-passing planned big hit. From the start to the end of the 3rd round, the V-attacker's opening/closing behavior (opening pattern) is the same. As a result, in the second modified example, similarly to the first modified example described above, it is visually determined through the opening/closing operation of the V-attacker whether the "7R fourth big win" or the "7R fifth big win" has occurred. becomes impossible. Further, in the present modified example 2 as well, until the third round ends, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing a specific effect (VS chance effect) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, through the effect display Also, it is difficult (substantially impossible) to determine which of the "7R 4th big win" and "7R 5th big win" has occurred. As a result, even in this modification 2, when a 7R big hit occurs, at least until the third round ends (until the chance round ends), the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence or absence of passing, etc. It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to discriminate (see through). In Modified Example 2, the release pattern of the V-attacker in the third round of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the release pattern of the V-attacker from the second time onward in the third round of the "7R 5th jackpot" are as described above. There is no particular limitation, and as long as it is possible to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to discriminate the type of jackpot, there is no particular limitation. Further, the round game after the fourth round of the "7R fourth big win" and "7R fifth big win" in the second modification can be dealt with in the same manner as in the first modification.

In addition, in the modification 2 shown in FIG. 64, the second and third rounds following the first round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and the V scheduled jackpot (for example, the 7R fourth jackpot) and the V scheduled non-passing The opening and closing behavior of the V-attacker in the 1st to 3rd rounds was consistent with the jackpot (for example, the 7R 5th jackpot), but the 1st round ( V round) and the second round (non-specific round) can be used to match the opening and closing motions of the V attacker. That is, even with the configuration in which the first opening (100 ms opening) in the third round of the 7R fifth big hit shown in the lower part of FIG. can be matched. Specifically, the 100 ms release that exists after the final 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed as the second round, not as the third round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000ms in the third round shown in the lower part of the same figure is the interval. . In this way, when the V round is the first round, the setting mode (combination) of the opening pattern of the V attacker in the specific round of the first round and the subsequent non-specific round, the first round to the third round In addition to 1st and 2nd rounds, the mode of opening and closing action of the V attacker is made to match between the scheduled V-passing jackpot (eg, 7R 4th jackpot) and the V-not-passing scheduled jackpot (eg, 7R 5th jackpot). becomes possible. By matching the opening and closing motions of the V-attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds, it is possible to use the first big prize hole 30 instead of the V-attacker in the 3rd round, and the opening pattern of the V-attacker can be changed. It is possible to widen the range of design of the round game while ensuring that it is difficult to distinguish the type of big hit based on the above.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, with respect to the V attacker opening pattern (opening/closing operation mode), except for the 15R jackpot, the jackpot games related to the V passing scheduled jackpot (12R second jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot) The opening pattern of the second round and the second and subsequent opening patterns of the first round of the jackpot game related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (12R third jackpot, 7R fifth jackpot, 2R eighth jackpot) are all the same. was. That is, all of the multiple V attacker openings in the second round (V round) of the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the second and subsequent times of the multiple V-attacker openings in the first round of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot , had the same aspect (see FIG. 49). However, not all V-attacker releases need to be the same. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first V-attacker opening in the second round of the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the second V-attacker opening in the first round of the V-not-passing scheduled jackpot are performed for 16000 ms (16 seconds). It was supposed to be opened once. Here, the game ball shooting performance (shooting speed) of a pachinko game machine is generally designed so that one game ball can be shot in 600 ms (0.6 seconds) (100 game balls in one minute). It is possible to shoot 10 game balls in 6000 ms (6 seconds) in terms of calculation. For this reason, during the jackpot game, excluding exceptions such as game ball shooting interruption and ball clogging, as long as the game ball is normally shot (right shot in this example), the opening time is 16000 ms (16 seconds). , it is possible to let the V attacker enter 10 game balls, that is, the prescribed number of game balls which is the condition for ending the round. From this, as long as the game ball continues to be shot during the opening from the start of the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds) of the V attacker, there is a possibility that the round end condition will be satisfied during the opening and proceed to the next round. Even if the round end condition is not satisfied during the opening, there is a high possibility that the round end condition will be satisfied within 4000 ms (4 seconds) after that, and advance to the next round. For this reason, the second and subsequent V attackers are released in the second round of the V-passing scheduled jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the third and subsequent V-attackers are released in the first round of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (see FIG. 49). less likely to be In other words, there is a high possibility of proceeding to the next round before all of the V attackers are released multiple times. From this, out of the V attacker opening multiple times in the second round of the V scheduled jackpot and the V attacker opening multiple times in the first round of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, at least, based on the specified number of balls By setting the opening patterns up to the opening times in which the round end condition can be satisfied respectively as the same pattern, it is possible to achieve the game characteristics and effects of the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the release pattern of the V attacker in the V round is a long release pattern with a long release time (first release pattern) and a short release pattern with a short release time (second release pattern). and Specifically, as a release pattern for a long release (V round release pattern for a planned V-passing big hit), a release pattern in which a 16000ms release is performed once, a 1000ms release is performed once, a 4000ms release is performed once, and a 1000ms release is performed twice in this order. (Open pattern with an open time of 23000 ms) is provided, and as an open pattern for short opening (V round open pattern for a planned big hit that has not been passed through V), an open pattern that opens once for 100 ms s Open twice in this order. (an open pattern with an open time of 100 ms) was provided. Of these, the open pattern of long open may be an open time that can increase the possibility of the game ball entering the V attacker (making it easier to enter), and the number of times of opening may be multiple times. or once, or both. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of difficulty (difficulty) in distinguishing between the planned V-passing big hit and the planned non-passing big hit, it is desirable to set the number of openings to be a plurality of times. In addition, the opening pattern of opening multiple times in the V round is not limited to the above-described embodiment or modification, and the number of opening times of opening multiple times is appropriately set in consideration of the difficulty of distinguishing the jackpot type. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the opening time of the V attacker when the first round is performed as a non-specific round, the opening time of the V attacker in the first round (first non-specific round) of the V passing scheduled jackpot and the opening time of the V attacker The opening time related to the first opening of the V attacker in the first round (second non-specific round) of the planned passing jackpot is set to a short time of 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and the game ball enters the V attacker. The possibility of doing so was low (virtually impossible). However, the release time of the V-attacker in this case may be longer than 100 ms, or may be the time during which the game ball is allowed to enter the V-attacker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the chance round is performed from the start of the jackpot game, that is, the configuration in which the chance round is performed in the 1st to 2nd rounds (the 1st to 3rd rounds in the modified example) is illustrated. However, the chance round may be performed during the jackpot game or may be performed including the end of the game. In other words, the release action of the V attacker in the chance round can be performed not only in the 1st and 2nd rounds (the 1st and 3rd rounds in the modified example) but also in other rounds. In addition, for all jackpot games, the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and the present invention Various patterns can be adopted without departing from the gist of the above.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode of the ending effect in the set ending period is not limited to the one described above. Another aspect of the ending production may be as follows. For example, the 7th 2R jackpot in the embodiment is a "V-passed planned jackpot" and has the same number of rounds (2 rounds) as the 2R 8th jackpot, which is a "V-not-passed planned jackpot". In these effects during the jackpot game, by executing a common effect so as to make it difficult to recognize whether the 2R 7th big win or the 2R 8th big win, the effect executed during the ending period (6th specific effect or A seventh specific effect) may indicate a game state to be shifted after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, in the ending period of 6000 ms of the 2R seventh jackpot, once (within 3900 ms), the third non-notification mode transition effect (for example, defeat effect) common to the 2R eighth jackpot is executed, and the rest of the ending period In the period of , it is possible to perform an effect (for example, a promotion effect, a revival effect) indicating that the state is shifted to a high probability state.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, among the plurality of round games constituting the special game, the specific round game may be one round game or may be a plurality of round games. When a plurality of round games are used as the specific round game, it is possible to determine the end period based on the specific area information after the last specific round game in the special game is completed. For example, the decision can be based on the end of the last particular round of play, the start of the next round of the last particular round of play, or the completion of all rounds of play. is. In addition, in the case of a big hit (specific result) in which the end period is not changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39, at a timing different from that of the big win (specific result) in which the ending period is changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39, You may decide which end period to use. For example, in the case of a jackpot (specific result) in which the end period is not changed, the end period may be determined before the start of the specific round game (V round), or may be determined along with the start of the big win game. Alternatively, it may be determined before starting the opening operation of the first round game in the jackpot game. Of course, the end period may be determined at the same timing in the case of a big win without changing the end period and in the case of a big win with a change in the end period.

Also, in the gaming machine described above, a big win (specific result) is provided in which the end period is changed depending on whether or not the specific area 39 is passed, but it is also possible to provide a big win with a different mode of change. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination is the first specified result, if the game ball passes through the specific area, the end period is set to the tenth period, and if the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the end period is set to the tenth period. The eleventh period, which is shorter than Then, when the result of the success/failure determination is the third specified result, when the game ball passes through the specified area, the end period is set to the 12th period different from the 10th period, and when the game ball does not pass through the specified area, the end period is terminated. The period may be a thirteenth period shorter than the twelfth period.

In the above-described embodiment, when the ending period (end period) is changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39, a long time is set when the specific area 39 is passed, and a short time is set when it is not passed. It is not limited to various modes. The end period determination means determines a short period (second period) when the game ball passes through the specific area, and determines a long period (first period) when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. You may make it Further, when the result of the success/failure determination in the above-described gaming machine is the first specified result and the special game is executed, the end period of different length is determined based on whether or not the specific area is passed, and the success/failure determination is performed. is the second specified result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length may be determined regardless of whether the specified area is passed or not.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a game privilege is given to the player to generate a high-probability state based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the jackpot game (during the special game). However, the privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to occurrence of a high probability state. For example, a high-base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole, a variable time shortened state (shorter working hours state) that shortens the variable time of identification information, etc. If there is, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Moreover, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be granted or a plurality of privileges may be granted. In addition, a pachinko machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state) has a specific area inside, and has a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening is provided that can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and the big winning opening is placed in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball for a predetermined time when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a big winning hole in which a ball is possible and passes through a specific area, it becomes a big win, a big win game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given to a Pachinko game machine. This pachinko game machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big win game is executed without passing through the specific area. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in generating the high probability state based on the game ball passing through the specific area, "10000" is set to the variable probability counter, and the number of executions of the special symbol suitability determination is 10,000. Until the next time, in other words, until the next big hit occurs, it has a specification that guarantees a high probability state (so-called "V probability loop machine"), but the value set in the probability variation counter is It is possible to set appropriately according to the specifications of. For example, when the value to be set in the probability variation counter based on the game ball passing through the specific area is set to "150", and the number of executions of the special symbol propriety determination in the high probability state becomes "150", the special symbol after the next time. The present invention is applied to a game machine (a so-called "V-probability ST machine") having a specification in which the success/failure determination is performed in a low probability state, that is, a specification in which a high probability state is not necessarily guaranteed until the next big hit occurs. is also possible. Alternatively, in addition to the probability variable counter, for example, a counter (jackpot counter) that counts the number of occurrences of the jackpot in a high probability state is provided, and the number of occurrences of the jackpot (count value of the jackpot counter) reaches a predetermined number (eg "5"). Then, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot of the predetermined number of times (for example, "fifth time") is finished, the game machine (so-called "V certainty set machine") of the specification is always (forced) to be in a low probability state. can also be applied.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of digesting the second special figure reservation with priority over the first special figure reservation, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but not limited to this, the first special figure reservation It may be a control process to be digested preferentially to the second special figure reservation, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested in order. Control processing, that is, control processing of digestion in the order of entry (in order of memory) may be used.

In the amusement machine described above, a starting port that allows a game ball to enter, a variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first mode, At least one of them may be provided, and identification information display means may be provided for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening or the variable type starting opening. In addition, the first pass/fail judgment is performed based on the variable ball entrance that can change between a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter, and the ball entered into the start hole. 1st right/wrong determination means for executing; 2nd right/wrong determination means for executing second right/wrong determination based on the ball entering the variable starter; A special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state may be provided. In addition, there are a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. It may be provided with a game state setting means for setting to. Here, 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

[others]
In a gaming machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, the possibility of a game ball passing through a specific area is determined by a variable ball entrance related to passage of a game ball into a specific area (hereinafter also referred to as "specific variable ball entrance"). It is common to make it different according to the opening pattern of . However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is to be started. It becomes possible to watch the pattern (opening action). Therefore, for example, at an early stage when the specific variable ball entrance starts to open, that is, at the beginning of the privilege determination game, it may be possible to determine the possibility or presence of passage of the game ball to the specific area. . In this way, if it is possible to determine the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area and the presence or absence of passing through the specific area at the beginning of the privilege determination game, before the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) or the relevant Before the result of the game is announced, it becomes possible to know whether or not the game ball will pass through the specific area. be. On the other hand, the following (1)- (5) is an example.
(1) identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
A variable ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the passage of at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
a first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the variable display of the identification information;
with
The first effect executing means, when the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific mode, causes the first effect to be executed when the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it ends after the bonus determining game in the special game after the game is started.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The variable ball entrance is provided in a non-enterable state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which a game ball can enter when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change between possible states and
The first effect executing means, when the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific mode, causes the first effect to be executed when the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific mode. The special game may be ended after the variable ball entrance becomes a state in which a ball can be entered at least once in the special game.

(2) identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
A variable ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the passage of at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
a first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the special game;
with
The first effect executing means, when executing the first effect during the special game, starts the first effect during variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and A game machine characterized in that the effect is ended after the privilege determining game in the special game is started after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The variable ball entrance is provided in a non-enterable state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which a game ball can enter when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change between possible states and
The first effect executing means, when executing the first effect during the special game, starts the first effect during variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and The effect may be ended after the variable ball entrance becomes a ball-enterable state at least once in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
a second effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined second effect after the end of the first effect during the special game;
a third effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined third effect during the variable display of the identification information;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect execution means can execute the second effect in the same effect mode as the third effect.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
The third effect execution means is capable of executing the third effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes,
The second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes similar to the third effect executable by the third effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized by:

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
A fourth effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined fourth effect based on the stop display of the identification information,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is harder to recognize than the first effect mode are provided as effect modes of the fourth effect when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
The fourth production execution means is
When the first effect is started during variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode during execution of the first effect, the identification information A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth effect based on the stop display is performed in the second effect mode.

In a gaming machine having a conventional privilege determination game, it is common to perform an effect for notifying the result of the privilege determination game (hereinafter also referred to as "result notification effect") during a special game. However, in the conventional result notification effect, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a certain period of time, such as when the special game is in progress and the bonus decision game is over, or when the result of the bonus decision game is confirmed. Many of them simply display an image (for example, a character image such as "V"). In this case, the effect of the presentation performed during the special game including the privilege determination game cannot be sufficiently obtained, and there is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered. On the other hand, the following inventions are proposed to enhance the effects of effects during special games including privilege determination games, and by extension, to improve the amusement of gaming machines equipped with privilege determination games. Examples are given in (6) to (14).

(6) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
A variable ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the passage of at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
a special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
with
The special game effect execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the special game after the privilege determination game is finished, the special game effect is executed in a performance mode indicating the result of the privilege determination game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The special game effect executing means executes the special game effect in a performance mode that does not indicate the result of the privilege determining game during the special game before the privilege determining game ends.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
An effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes of the special game effect to be executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed,
The special game effect execution means executes the special game effect after the privilege determination game is completed, based on the effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means. A game machine characterized by

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In addition, as the effect mode indicating the result of the privilege determination game, there are a passing mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area and a non-passing mode indicating that the game ball has not passed through the specific area. have
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means is provided with an effect mode corresponding to the passing mode and an effect mode corresponding to the non-passing mode. .

(10) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
A variable ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the passage of at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
a special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
with
The special game effect executing means starts a result notification effect indicating the result of the privilege determining game as the special game effect during the special game and after the privilege determining game ends. .

(11) In the gaming machine described in (10) above,
storage means for storing a plurality of presentation modes of the result notification presentation;
a selection means for selecting an effect mode of the result notification effect to be executed from among a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means;
with
The selection means selects an effect mode of the result notification effect before the end of the privilege determination game,
The special game effect execution means starts the result notification effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The special game effect execution means executes a selection effect indicating a result of selection by the selection means as the special game effect during the special game and before the end of the privilege determination game. machine.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12) above,
The special game effect execution means executes the result notification effect, which is started after the end of the privilege determination game during the special game, in a mode according to the result of the privilege determination game. .
In addition, in the gaming machine described in any one of (10) to (13) above,
The special game effect execution means may execute the result notification effect, which is started after the privilege determination game is completed during the special game, as a series of performances after the privilege determination game is completed.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (13) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from the end of the special game to the end of the special game is longer than the period from the start of the special game to the end of the special game.

In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, regarding awarding of benefits, a game ball that enters a predetermined variable ball entrance during a special game is distributed to a specific area or a non-specific area by a distribution device in the variable ball entrance, A game machine is known that provides a privilege when a game ball passes through a specific area. If a sorting device is provided inside the variable ball entrance in this manner, there is a risk that game balls may be caught in the movable portion of the sorting device, resulting in ball clogging. If such a situation occurs, in the worst case, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance will not be distributed to the specific area side, and the player may miss the opportunity to receive the privilege. In addition, there has been a conventional game machine having a discharge device such as a payout device that has a control to eliminate the ball jam by executing a predetermined retry operation when such a ball jam occurs. . However, in the big-hit game, simply performing a retry operation or the like to eliminate problems such as clogged balls may cause the big-hit game to stagnate in the middle. In addition, if the jackpot game stagnates, there is a possibility that the player may lose interest in the game. The inventions (15) to (28) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and are intended to make the jackpot game proceed quickly and smoothly, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(15) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
a special game executing means for executing a special game of changing the variable ball entrance to a ball-enterable state based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
ball entry detection means for detecting the entry of a ball into the variable ball entrance;
a discharge detection means for detecting discharge of the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means;
a movable member arranged in a path until the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and capable of changing the flowing direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation; A gaming machine,
The special game consists of a plurality of round games,
In the round game, the variable ball entrance is in a state in which a ball can be entered or a state in which a ball cannot be entered in a predetermined pattern,
In the case of executing a predetermined round game, after finishing the last ball-enterable state in the round game, the variable ball-entry port is set to a ball-unable state and a predetermined confirmation process is executed,
The confirmation process includes at least
match determination processing for determining whether or not the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance and the number of discharges in the round game match based on the detection results of the ball entry detection means and the discharge detection means;
a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball inlet and the number of balls discharged do not match in the match determination process,
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during a period before execution of the movable member operation process,
Before executing the movable member operation processing, if it is determined in the match determination processing that the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance and the number of ejections match, the confirmation processing is performed without executing the movable member operation processing. A game machine characterized by ending the.

(16) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
ball entry detection means for detecting the ball entering the second variable ball entrance;
a discharge detection means for detecting discharge of the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means;
a movable member arranged on a path until the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and capable of changing the traveling direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation; is a game machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games, and one of the first variable ball entrance and the second variable ball entrance changes to a ball-enterable state for each round game. is,
When executing the predetermined round game in which the second variable ball entrance is in the state where the ball can be entered, after finishing the last state where the ball can be entered in the round game, the ball is entered through the second variable ball entrance A predetermined confirmation process is executed as a disabled state,
The confirmation process includes at least
match determination processing for determining whether or not the number of balls entering the second variable ball entrance and the number of discharges in the round game match based on the detection results of the ball entry detection means and the discharge detection means;
a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the second variable ball inlet and the number of ejections do not match in the match determination process,
As the special game, a first round game in which the first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state, and a second round game in which the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state, A special game having a pattern of executing the first round game next to the second round game in the execution pattern of the round game,
In the case of executing the confirmation process after the special game is executed and the last possible ball entry state in the second round game is completed, at least part of the confirmation process is performed in the first round game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to play during execution.

As a result, without waiting for the completion of the confirmation process, the confirmation process of the predetermined round game and the next round game of the predetermined round game (the state in which the next round game can be entered) can be executed in parallel. , and the jackpot game can be progressed quickly and smoothly. This is a pattern ( This is made possible by providing a special game that has (or vice versa).

(17) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
a special game executing means for executing a special game of changing the variable ball entrance to a ball-enterable state based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
ball entry detection means for detecting the entry of a ball into the variable ball entrance;
first discharge detection means and second discharge detection means for detecting discharge of the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means;
a movable member that guides the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means to a specific area or a non-specific area by performing a predetermined action;
A gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area,
The second ejection detection means detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The special game consists of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least
a specific round game capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area or a non-specific area while putting the variable ball entrance into a ball-enterable state;
a non-specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is put in a ball-enterable state and a game ball is guided to a non-specific area;
In the case of executing a predetermined round game, after finishing the last ball-enterable state in the round game, the variable ball-entry port is set to a ball-unable state and a predetermined confirmation process is executed,
The confirmation process includes at least
Whether or not the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance in the round game matches the number of balls discharged is determined based on the detection results of the ball entry detection means, the first discharge detection means, and the second discharge detection means. A match determination process that determines by
a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball inlet and the number of balls discharged do not match in the match determination process,
As the special game, the special game has the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and the execution pattern of the round game has a pattern in which the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game. prepared,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when executing the special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed next to the non-specific round game. .

A specific round game that operates a movable member to distribute a game ball that has entered the variable ball entrance to a specific area or a non-specific area has the possibility of causing a ball clogging in the variable ball entrance. Higher than a specific round game. Therefore, by performing the confirmation process in the specific round game, it is possible to accurately discover and eliminate ball clogging and the like. In addition, since the specific round game is an important round game that determines whether or not to give benefits, if a ball jam occurs before the specific round game starts, there is a possibility that unexpected damage will be caused to the player. . Therefore, it is a round game before the start of the specific land game, and even in the non-specific round game in which the same variable ball entrance is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, by performing the confirmation process, the ball clogging etc. in the non-specific round game A specific round game can be started after confirming that there is no clogged ball, or after accurately discovering and eliminating clogged balls or the like. As a result, it is possible to start the specific round game in a normal state without ball jamming or the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage.

(18) In the gaming machine described in (15) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when executing the confirmation process, the next round game can be executed after the confirmation process is completed.

(19) In the gaming machine described in (16) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform at least the movable member operation process during execution of the first round game among the confirmation processes related to the second round game.

(20) In the gaming machine described in (16) or (19) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform at least the matching determination process among the confirmation processes related to the second round game during execution of the first round game.

(21) In the gaming machine described in (16), (19) or (20) above,
As the special game, the 1st round game and the 2nd round game are included, and in the execution pattern of the round game, the 1st round game and the 2nd round game are performed next to the 2nd round game. including a first special game having a pattern to be executed in order;
In the case of executing the confirmation process after executing the first special game and ending the final possible ball entry state in the second round game,
At least part of the confirmation process can be performed during execution of the first round game, which is the next round game of the second round game, and the first round game is followed by the first round game. This game machine is characterized in that, when there is a plan to execute a 2nd round game, the 2nd round game is not executed until the confirmation processing is completed.

(22) In the gaming machine described in (17) above,
A game characterized by executing the confirmation process at least in both the first specific round game executed in the special game and the non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. machine.

(23) In the gaming machine described in (17) or (22) above,
As the special game, while having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, in the execution pattern of the round game, the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game, and thereafter the non- including a first special game having a pattern for executing a specific round game;
When executing the first special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed next to the non-specific round game, and the final A gaming machine characterized in that the matching determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed in the non-specific round game executed after the specific round game.

(24) In the gaming machine described in (16), (17), (19) to (23) above,
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during a period before execution of the movable member operation process,
Before executing the movable member operation processing, if it is determined in the match determination processing that the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance and the number of ejections match, the confirmation processing is performed without executing the movable member operation processing. A game machine characterized by ending the.

(25) In the gaming machine described in (15), (16), (18) to (21) above,
The discharge detection means comprises first discharge detection means and second discharge detection means,
By performing a predetermined operation of the movable member, the game ball detected by the entering ball detection means is guided to a specific area or a non-specific area,
A gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area,
The gaming machine, wherein the second ejection detection means detects a game ball passing through the specific area.

(26) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (25) above,
The second ejection detection means is set with a valid period during which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected and an invalid period when a privilege is not given even when a game ball is detected,
After completing the final ball-enterable state in the specific round game, the valid period is continued for a first period while the variable ball-entering opening is kept in a ball-unenterable state, and after the first period elapses, the invalid period is established. in the event that
After the invalid period continues for a second period, the movable member operation processing can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the effective period after the last state in which a ball can be entered in the round game ends.

(27) In the gaming machine described in (26) above, the gaming machine is characterized in that the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during each of the first period and the second period.

(28) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (27) above,
The game machine, wherein the match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process.

(29) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (28) above, it is possible to add the following configuration.
Specifically, in the gaming machine described above, "as the confirmation process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance and the number of ejections do not match, an error is reported in a predetermined manner after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. has an error notification process that executes
The match determination process can be executed multiple times during the period before execution of the error notification process,
Before execution of the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance matches the number of discharges, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. good.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during execution of the error notification process,
During execution of the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance matches the number of discharges, the error notification being executed is terminated and the confirmation process is terminated. good too.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above, "the match determination process can be executed multiple times during execution of the error notification,
In the match determination process executed during error notification, if it is not determined that the number of balls entering the variable entrance matches the number of discharges, the error notification is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and confirmation processing is performed. Terminate.

Further, in the game machine described above, "the error notification process can be executed when the third period elapses after the movable member operation process ends,
The match determination process can be executed multiple times in the third period,
During execution of the third period, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance matches the number of discharges, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. good.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above, the specific round game allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and when the game ball passes through the specific area, a privilege is granted. It is good also as "a round game that can give the privilege of." On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, the movable member does not operate and the game ball does not pass through the specific area (all pass through the non-specific area). It is good also as "a round game which does not give."

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, "a special game having a pattern in which a specific round game is executed next to a non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game" means that among a plurality of round games constituting the special game, It is sufficient to have a part that is executed in the order of a non-specific round game and a specific round game, and for other round games, whether it is a non-specific round game or a specific round game, other rounds It does not matter if it is a game.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "the first special game having a pattern of executing the first round game next to the second round game as the execution pattern of the round game" means the execution of the round game executed in the special game. In a part of the pattern, a second round game in which the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state and a first round game in which the first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state are continuously executed. It suffices if there is a pattern to play, and the other round games may be either the first round game or the second round game. Further, it is sufficient to execute the confirmation process in a specific second round game, and the confirmation process may or may not be executed in other round games. For example, in a special game consisting of 15 round games, the second round is the second round game, the third round is the first round game, and the confirmation process can be executed in the second round game of the second round. If so, the other round game may be any round game, and the confirmation process may or may not be executed. Moreover, as a special game, it suffices if a special game having such an execution pattern is provided, and in addition, a special game that does not have such an execution pattern may be provided.

Conventionally, in a special game, a game ball passes through a specific area in a big winning opening, a predetermined privilege is given, an ending period is provided after all the opening operations in the special game are completed, and a special game is performed during this ending period. There is an ending production that notifies the player of the game mode (privilege granting state) to which the game is to be switched after the end of the game. In the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-161615), a plurality of effects are provided as ending effects, and during a specific ending period that is set, the ending effect according to the game mode that shifts after the end of the jackpot game. stated to be carried out. However, in such a game machine, no matter what kind of game state the game mode is after the shift, the ending effect composed of the same effect period is executed. was becoming The inventions (30) to (38) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and by setting the ending period according to the game result, an appropriate ending according to the game state to be shifted is provided. To improve the amusement of a game by making performance executable.

(30) success/failure determination means for determining success/failure based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the suitability determination;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
A specific area provided in the variable ball entrance through which a game ball can pass;
special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance can be changed to a state in which the player can enter a ball by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of the success/failure determination becomes a specific result. ,
A gaming machine capable of providing a predetermined privilege based on the special game being executed and the game ball passing through the specific area,
The special game consists of a predetermined number of round games,
When executing the special game, the identification information can be variably displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after all round games in the special game are completed,
End period determination means for determining one of a plurality of end periods of different lengths as the end period,
The gaming machine, wherein the end period determining means can determine the end period with different lengths based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

(31) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
A ball entrance that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode,
game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the ball entrance is higher than that of the first game state;
Having a first identification result as the identification result,
When executing the special game with the first specified result in the first game state, determining the end period of different length based on whether or not the specified area is passed,
When the special game is executed with the first specified result in the second game state, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether the specified area is passed or not. game machine.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the first specified result as the specified result, and when the first specified result is obtained in the (normal) first game state in which the frequency of game ball entry is low, determines end periods of different lengths depending on whether or not a particular region is passed. In addition, in the second game state in which the frequency of game ball entry is high, when the first specified result is obtained, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether the specified area is passed or not. (that is, the end period does not change). As a result, for example, in a normal state, by changing the end period by passing or not passing through the specific area (granting or not granting benefits), the variable display of identification information starts after an appropriate length of the end period. It is possible to give sharpness to the mode of transition of the game state. On the other hand, if it is already in the second game state (for example, high base state), by not changing the end period by passing or not passing through the specific area (granting or non-granting of benefits), By setting an appropriate end period, it is possible to give sharpness to the game state transition mode.

(32) In the gaming machine described in (31) above,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state setting means can set the gaming state after the special game ends to the second gaming state.

(33) In the gaming machine described in (30) to (32) above,
Probability setting means capable of setting a success/failure determination probability of determining that the result of the success/failure determination is the specified result to a predetermined probability or a high probability higher than the predetermined probability,
A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the fact that the special game is executed and the game ball passes through the specific area, the probability of success/failure determination after the end of the special game is set to the high probability.

(34) In the gaming machine described in (30) to (33) above,
An end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means,
As a production that can be executed during the end period, a plurality of productions with different production modes and production periods are provided,
The game machine, wherein the end period effect means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determination means.

(35) In the gaming machine described in (34) above,
The game machine is characterized in that the end period effect means can execute an effect indicating a game state set after the special game during the end period determined by the end period determination means.

(36) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
having at least a first period and a second period shorter than the first period as the ending period;
The end period determining means determines the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game, and determines the first period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game. A second time period may be determined.

(37) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
Having a first identification result and a second identification result as the identification result,
When the result of the success/failure determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end period determining means determines the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game. Determine, determine the second period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game,
When the result of the success/failure determination is the second specified result and the special game is executed, the end period determination means is the same whether or not the game ball passes through the specified area in the special game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the end period of length.

According to such a gaming machine, the specified result has the first specified result and the second specified result, and when the result of the success/failure determination is the first specified result and the special game is executed, the special Depending on whether or not the specific area is passed in the game, end periods of different lengths are determined (first period for passage, second period for non-passage). In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed in the special game ( That is, the end period does not change). Thereby, depending on the type of the identification result, it is possible to change the end period or leave the end period unchanged by passing or not passing through the specific area (granting or non-granting of privilege). In addition, this makes it possible to set an appropriate length of end period depending on the type of identification result, and after an appropriate length of end period has passed, it is possible to start variable display of identification information, It becomes possible to give sharpness to the mode of transition of the game state.

(38) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
An end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means,
As a production that can be executed during the end period, a plurality of productions with different production modes and production periods are provided,
The end period effect means executes a effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determination means,
When the result of the success/failure determination is the first specified result and the special game is executed, the end period effect means is the game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determination means. Execute a production that can recognize the state,
When the result of the success/failure determination is the second specified result and the special game is executed, the end period effect means is the game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determination means This game machine is characterized by executing a performance whose state is difficult to recognize.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the winning/failure determination is the first specified result and the special game is executed, the effect in the end period is an effect that allows recognition of the game state set after the special game. Run. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination is the second specified result and the special game is executed, the effect during the end period is such that the game state set after the special game is difficult to recognize. As a result, when the result of the success/failure determination is the first specified result, if the game ball passes through the specified area, the end period of the first period (long term) is set, and the game ball passes through the specified area. If not, the end period of the second period (short period) is set. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect in which the game state after transition (for example, high probability state, low probability state, etc.) can be recognized during the end period of an appropriate length set according to whether the privilege is granted or not. becomes. Further, when the result of the success/failure determination is the second specified result, an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the game state after transition (for example, high probability state, low probability state) is performed in the set end period. A similar effect (for example, non-notification effect) is executed whether or not the specific area is passed. Therefore, when the second specified result is obtained, an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the game state after transition is performed in the specified end period without changing the end period set by passing or not passing through the specified area. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to set an appropriate length of the end period according to the transition mode of the game state and the performance mode performed during the end period. In addition, this makes it possible to start variable display of the identification information after an appropriate length of end period has passed, and to give sharpness to the mode of transition of the game state.

The patent document (JP 2014-161615) has five types of special games A to E, and the number of game balls that can be acquired varies depending on the type of special game (500 balls to 2000). is stated. Therefore, in the case of a special game with a large number of game balls that can be obtained, the interest in the game is enhanced, but in the case of a special game with a small number of game balls that can be obtained, the interest in the game is reduced and the motivation to play is reduced. can reduce In particular, if the acquired special game is a special game with a small number of game balls that can be acquired as a result of playing a game without acquiring a special game for a long time, the possibility of lowering the motivation to play becomes particularly high. There is The inventions (39) to (47) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and when a jackpot with a relatively low profit for the player occurs, the jackpot with a high profit for the player is To maintain and improve amusement in a game by making the start of a jackpot game more difficult to understand than when it occurs, thereby preventing a player's desire to play the game from decreasing.

(39) A ball entrance that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode,
a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the ball entrance is higher than that in the first game state;
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the determination;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the identification information is stopped in a specific manner and the variable ball entrance can be changed to a state in which a ball can be entered when the result of the determination is a specific result;
having at least a first identification result and a second identification result as the identification result;
When the result of the determination becomes the first specified result, the first special game is executed, and when the result becomes the second specified result, the second special game is executed,
At least as effects that can be executed during the special game, there are a first special effect in which the start of the special game can be easily recognized, and a second special effect in which the start of the special game is more difficult to recognize than the first special effect. , and
In at least one of the first game state or the second game state, if the result of the determination is the first specific result, the state after the end of the first special game is the second game state, and the result of the determination is In the case of the second specified result, after the end of the second special game is set as the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first special effect is executed in the first special game, and the second special effect is executed in the second special game.

(40) In the gaming machine of (39) above,
Equipped with a specific start opening that allows game balls to enter,
The predetermined condition is at least established based on the game ball entering the specific start hole,
Having a plurality of specific results including the second specific result as a result of the determination based on the ball entering the specific starting port,
When the result of the determination based on the ball entering the specific starting hole is the specified result, the second specified result is the specified result with the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of specified results. game machine.

(41) In the gaming machine of (39) or (40) above,
Probability setting means capable of setting a probability of determining that the determination result is the specific result to a predetermined probability or a high probability higher than the predetermined probability,
As the variable entrance, having a specific variable entrance having a specific area inside,
The probability setting means can set the high probability after the end of the special game based on the game ball passing through the specific area in the special game,
As the execution mode of the special game, a first execution mode in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is high, and a second execution mode in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is low,
The gaming machine, wherein the second special game is executed in the second execution mode.

(42) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (41) above,
Having a third identification result as the identification result,
When the result of the determination becomes the third specified result, a third special game is executed,
In at least one of the first game state and the second game state, if the result of the determination is the third specified result, the state after the end of the third special game is set as the second game state,
In the third special game, the second special effect is executed, and as the second special effect, a different effect result from the second special effect executed in the second special game is executed. Characteristic game machine.

(43) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (42) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the start timing of the second special performance is earlier than the start timing of the first special performance.

(44) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (43) above,
The first special effect is a different effect from the variable effect executed during the variable display of the identification information related to the first specified result, and after the end of the variable effect, the first special game is started. It is a production that starts after executing the start production shown,
The gaming machine, wherein the second special effect is a series of effects that start during execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second specified result.

(45) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (44) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that both the first special game and the second special game are capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profits.

(46) In the gaming machine of (44) or (45) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, during the execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second specified result, a transition is made from an effect suggesting that the determination result is not the specified result to the second special effect.

(47) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (46) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a second special performance in the second special game, a performance of a performance result suggesting that the determination result is not a specific result is executed, and the second special game is terminated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine,
"As a variable effect that starts and ends during the execution of variable display of identification information,
If the result of the judgment is a specific result, a production that suggests that the result of the judgment is a specific result (production of a hit mode) is executed, and if the result of the judgment is not a specific result, the result of the judgment is a specific result. It has a specific effect that executes a performance that suggests that it is not the result (a production of an outlier mode),
In the second special effect, an effect common to the effect suggesting that the result of the determination in the specific effect is not the specific result (effect of the failure mode) may be executed.

In addition, in the aforementioned game machine,
"As a specified result, having a third specified result of executing a third special game,
At least a third special effect is provided as an effect that can be executed during the special game,
The third special effect that can be executed during the special game is a performance that is executed at least during the third special game, and is a performance that makes it harder to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. ,
When the result of determination in the first game state becomes the third specified result, the third special effect is executed along with the third special game, and the second game state is set after the third special game is finished. good.

Moreover, it is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that the determination result is a specific result in the third special effect, and end the third special game.
Also, as a variable effect that starts and ends during the execution of the variable display of identification information,
When the judgment result is a specific result, an effect is executed to suggest that the judgment result is a specific result, and when the judgment result is not a specific result, it is suggested that the judgment result is not a specific result. It has a specific production that executes the production,
In the third special effect, an effect common to the effect suggesting that the determination result in the specific effect is the specific result may be executed.

This makes it difficult to notice the start of the special game, and some players may have the impression that an advantageous state (second game state) has occurred without the special game being executed. Here, the third special effect can be the same effect mode as the second special effect as an effect mode in which the start of the special game is more difficult to recognize than the first special effect. Also, the second special effect may not execute the start effect.

Furthermore, other inventions related to each of the inventions described above are exemplified in (48) to (79) below.
(48) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
A variable ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the passage of at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance through the specific area;
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
A gaming machine comprising
a special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
storage means for storing a plurality of performance modes related to special game performances that can be executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed;
selection means for selecting an effect mode to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means based on the result of the privilege determination game;
has
The gaming machine, wherein the special game executing means executes the special game effect during the special game after the privilege determining game is finished, based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means.

(49) In the gaming machine of (48) above,
The selecting means selects the effect mode to be executed based on a predetermined selection rate according to the result of the privilege determination game when selecting the effect mode to be executed from the plurality of effect modes. game machine.

(50) In the gaming machine of (48) or (49) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the special game effect executing means executes the special game effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determining game.

(51) In the gaming machine according to any one of (48) to (50) above,
The special game execution means executes the special game effect during the special game before the privilege determination game ends in a mode indicating which of the plurality of effect modes is selected. A game machine characterized by

(52) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
Among the plurality of round games, a predetermined number of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a round game after the predetermined number can be executed as the specific round game,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
When the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to a predetermined time after the specific round game starts; , When the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game is the same. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine (52) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, it is highly likely that the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. become a thing. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or non-existent. . Then, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable ball entrance when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game Similar to the opening pattern of the mouth. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and by extension, it is possible to have a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the "predetermined time after the start of the specific round game from the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game", the "predetermined time after the start of the specific round game" ” includes a predetermined time until the end of the specific round game (during the specific round game), and a predetermined time in the next round game (after the next round) after the end of the specific round game. . It should be noted that the subsequent round games may be non-specific round games, specific round games, or other round games. Similarly, "the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game" in the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game from the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game , including a predetermined time until the end of the non-specific round game (during the non-specific round game), and a predetermined time in the next and subsequent round games (after the next round) that are performed after the end of the non-specific round game It is a thing. It should be noted that the subsequent round games may be non-specific round games, specific round games, or other round games.

(53) In the gaming machine of (52) above,
One round of the game ends when at least a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entrance,
A predetermined time after the start of the specific round game in the first special game and a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game are each the predetermined number of game balls by the time. A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed so that a ball can be entered into a ball opening.

(54) In the gaming machine of (52) or (53) above,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the specific round game in the first special game, and the above from the start to the end of the non-specific round game in the second special game A gaming machine characterized by having the same opening pattern as the variable entrance.

(55) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (54) above,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game when executing the specific round game in the second special game is the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the first special game. A gaming machine characterized by an open pattern in which the possibility of a game ball entering is lower than that of an open pattern.

(56) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (55) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that a first round game among the plurality of round games is executed as the non-specific round game, and a second round game following this is executed as the specific round game.

(57) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (56) above,
Provided with a production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The effect execution means executes the same effect at least after the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game and after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game. Amusement machine.

(58) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (57) above,
In addition to the variable ball entrance, there is another variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball. have
The other variable ball entrance is during the special game, and in a round game other than the non-specific round game and the specific round game among the plurality of round games, the ball is entered in a predetermined open pattern. It is possible,
The opening pattern when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the first special game and the opening pattern when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the second special game are the same. A gaming machine characterized by:

(59) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The variable ball entrance is opened and closed during the special game to enter the ball-enterable state or the ball-enterable state,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated. and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
When executing the non-specific round game in the round game of the predetermined number of times of the first special game and executing the specific round game in the next round game of the predetermined number of times, the variable in the non-specific round game opening the ball entrance at least once and performing an opening/closing operation for opening the variable ball entrance in the specific round game after a predetermined closing time has elapsed;
When the non-specific round game is executed in the predetermined number of round games of the second special game, in the non-specific round game, in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game A gaming machine characterized in that the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entrance is performed in the same manner as the opening and closing operation.

According to the gaming machine of (59) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, it is highly likely that the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. become a thing. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or non-existent. . Then, the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entrance when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable ball entrance when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game The opening and closing operations of the mouth are the same. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and by extension, it is possible to have a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine.

(60) In the gaming machine of (59) above,
When executing the specific round game in the next round game of the predetermined number of times of the second special game, in the specific round game, compared to the specific round game in the first special game, to the variable ball entrance A gaming machine characterized in that the variable ball entrance is opened in such a manner that the possibility of a game ball entering is reduced.

(61) In the gaming machine of (59) or (60) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

(62) In the gaming machine according to any one of (59) to (61) above,
Provided with a production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production executing means is
Execute a series of effects in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game,
A gaming machine characterized in that an effect similar to the series of effects is executed in at least the non-specific round game in the second special game.

(63) In the gaming machine according to any one of (59) to (62) above,
In addition to the variable ball entrance, there is another variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball. have
The other variable ball entrance is opened and closed during the special game to be in the state where the ball can be entered or the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the non-specific round game and The ball can be entered in a round game other than the specific round game,
The same opening/closing operation when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the first special game and the opening/closing operation when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the second special game. A game machine characterized by performing in the mode of

(64) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to prevent game balls from entering and that is open to allow game balls to enter;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
The variable ball entrance can be opened at a predetermined opening time during the special game,
As the special game, at least
Among the plurality of round games, the predetermined number of round games is set as a first unspecified round in which a first opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the variable ball entrance is set to a first time and the movable member is not operated. and performing a second opening operation in which the opening time of the variable ball entrance is set to a second time longer than the first time, and operating the movable member in the next round game of the predetermined number of times. A first special game to be executed as one specific round;
A second special game in which the predetermined number of round games is performed as a second non-specific round in which opening operations similar to the first opening operation and the second opening operation are performed in this order and the movable member is not operated. ,
A game machine characterized by having

According to the gaming machine of (64) above, the second opening operation when the first specific round is executed increases the possibility of the game ball entering the variable ball entrance (entering the ball becomes easier). The opening operation is performed, and since the movable member operates in the first specific round in which the second opening operation is performed, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. becomes highly probable. On the other hand, in the first non-specific round and the second non-specific round, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area, and may pass through the specific area. is low or absent. Then, the opening operation (first opening operation, second opening operation) of the variable entrance when the first non-specific round and the first specific round are executed in the first special game, and in the second special game The opening operation of the variable entrance when the second non-specific round is executed is the same. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the operation of opening the variable ball entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and by extension, it is possible to have a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine.

(65) In the gaming machine of (64) above,
In the second special game, the opening time of the variable ball entrance is set to be shorter than the second time in the next round game for the predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the variable ball entrance. A gaming machine characterized by performing a third opening action with a probability lower than that of the first specific round and executing it as a second specific round in which the movable member is operated.

(66) In the gaming machine of (64) or (65) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the second opening operation is an opening operation for opening the variable ball entrance a plurality of times within the second time period.

(67) In the gaming machine according to any one of (64) to (66) above,
In the first special game, after executing the round game as the first non-specific round, after a predetermined interval period, the round game as the first specific round is executed,
In the second special game, when the round game as the second non-specific round is executed, after performing the first opening operation, the second opening operation is performed after the same closing time as the interval period. A game machine characterized by

(68) In the gaming machine according to any one of (64) to (67) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

(69) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to prevent game balls from entering and that is open to allow game balls to enter;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
The variable entrance can be opened in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game,
As the opening pattern of the variable entrance, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entrance is set to a predetermined time and a second opening pattern in which the opening time is shorter than that of the first opening pattern. having an open pattern and
As the round game, at least
A first specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A second specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is opened in the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
a non-specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is opened in a predetermined opening pattern and the movable member is not operated;
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game,
It has either one or both of a previous round game that continues before the predetermined number of times and a post-round game that follows the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the pre-round game and the post-round game are the non- executable as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game , and
In the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance in the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, and in the second special game A gaming machine characterized in that when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, opening patterns of the variable ball entrance during the execution period are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (69) above, the opening pattern (first opening pattern) of the variable ball entrance when the first specific round game is executed is the variable entrance opening pattern when the second specific round game is executed. Since the opening time of the ball opening pattern (second opening pattern) is longer than that of the ball opening pattern (second opening pattern), the possibility of the game ball entering the variable ball opening is higher in the first specific round game than in the second specific round game. ball becomes easier). Therefore, in the first specific round game, the game ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area than in the second specific round game. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area and does not pass through the specific area. And, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second specific round game and the second special game in the second special game The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance through the round game when the non-specific round game is executed is the same. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and by extension, it is possible to have a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the game interest of the game machine.

In addition, ``has either or both of the previous round game that follows the predetermined number of times and the post-round game that follows the predetermined number of times'' means that the round game following the predetermined number of times , the case of existence after a predetermined number of times, and the case of existence before and after the predetermined number of times. Further, "either one or both of the preceding round game and the following round game can be executed as the non-specific round game" means that the round game existing before the predetermined number of rounds is executed as the non-specific round game. This includes a case where the round game that exists after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game, and a case where the round game that exists before and after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game. Also, for "the first specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the first special game and "the second specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the second special game, a specific round game (first specific A round game, a second specific round game) and a non-specific round game may be executed first (or later). That is, even if the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is "first" and the non-specific round game is "after", the non-specific round game is "first" and the specific round game (second 1 specific round game, 2nd specific round game) may be "later". In addition, "the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed" means from the start of either the first specific round game or the non-specific round game Refers to the period until the end of the other round game, "the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed" means the second specific round game and the non-specific round game refers to the period from the start of one of the round games to the end of the other round game.

(70) In the gaming machine of (69) above,
A gaming machine characterized by having at least one previous round game before the predetermined number of times, and executing the previous round game as the non-specific round game.

According to the gaming machine of (70) above, the first special game for executing at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least one that follows the second specific round game A specification comprising a second special game that executes one round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game followed by a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game), in the specification with a special game (first special game, second special game), through that one non-specific round game and specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance becomes the same between the first special game and the second special game. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (first special game or second special game) in the specification.

(71) In the gaming machine of (69) or (70) above,
At least one post-round game is played after the predetermined number of times, and the post-round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

According to the gaming machine (71) above, the first special game for executing at least one round game following the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least one round game following the second specific round game A second special game that executes the round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game next to the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In specifications with special games (first special game, second special game) that execute It is possible to make the pattern the same for the first special game and the second special game. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (first special game or second special game) in the specification. Incidentally, the specification can include the specification relating to the game machine in (66) above. That is, after at least one non-specific round game, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed, and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) Even in specifications that include a special game (first special game, second special game) that executes at least one non-specific round game next to, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through each round game is the first special It is possible to make the game and the second special game the same.

(72) In the gaming machine according to any one of (69) to (71) above,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game or a second round game.

(73) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated. and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
Among the plurality of round games, a predetermined number of round games can be executed as the specific round game, and the next round game of the predetermined number can be executed as the non-specific round game,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the first special game allows more game balls to enter than the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly flexible open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second When the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the special game, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game is the same. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine (73) above, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance when the specific round game is executed in the first special game is the opening pattern when the specific round game is executed in the second special game. Compared to the open pattern of the variable ball entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the variable ball entrance is higher (entering the ball is easier), so the first special game is a game compared to the second special game. It is highly probable that the sphere will be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. And, when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game, and the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the second special game Since the opening pattern of the variable ball opening through the round game is the same when is executed, the first special game and the second special game can be distinguished from the opening pattern of the variable ball opening. it gets harder. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and by extension, it is possible to have a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine.

(74) In the gaming machine of (73) above,
The opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game and the opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the non-specific round game.

(75) In the gaming machine of (73) or (74) above,
The number of openings of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the non-specific round game based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance is the same.

(76) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated. and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
A round game of a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a round game next to the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the first special game allows more game balls to enter than the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly flexible open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second When the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the special game, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game is the same. Amusement machine.

The gaming machine (76) above is obtained by reversing the execution order of the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the gaming machine (73) above. That is, the round game following the non-specific round game can be executed as the specific round game. Also in the gaming machine of (76) above, similarly to the gaming machine of (73) above, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low passability is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and whether or not it passes, and furthermore, it is equipped with a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game). It is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine.

(77) In the gaming machine of (76) above,
The opening time of the variable ball opening based on the opening pattern of the variable ball opening from the start of the non-specific round in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the non-specific in the second special game A gaming machine characterized in that the opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of a round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(78) In the gaming machine of (76) or (77) above,
The number of openings of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the non-specified number in the second special game A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times the variable ball entrance is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of a round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(79) In the gaming machine according to any one of (73) to (78) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

1 pachinko game machine, 7 image display device, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display unit), 8 production pattern, 20 first start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big prize opening, 35 second big prize mouth, 39 specific area, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub Control board (sub control unit) 100 Image control board (image control unit) 103a 1st special figure reservation display for production 103b 2nd special figure reservation display for production 150 Movable piece.

Claims (1)

identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
special game executing means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a variable ball entrance that is closed to make it impossible to enter a game ball, and that is opened to make it possible to enter a game ball;
a payout device that pays out prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the variable ball entrance;
a movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable ball entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined action;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance passing through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising production control means capable of controlling production,
The variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is configured to include multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is brought into the ball-enterable state and the movable member is operated. and a non-specific round game that does not operate,
The specific round game and the non-specific round game among the plurality of round games are configured to be continuously executed with a predetermined interval period interposed therebetween,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
The movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the first special game is such that the passage of the game ball to the specific area is greater than the movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the second special game. It is an operation pattern that is facilitated,
The movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the second special game is such that the passage of the game ball to the specific area is greater than the movement pattern of the movable member in the specific round game in the first special game. It is a difficult operation pattern,
The first special game is a special game with a higher possibility of passage of the game ball to the specific area than the second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the execution period when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the specific round game in the second special game When the non-specific round game is executed, the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance during the execution period is the same, including a pattern in which the ball can be easily entered into the variable ball entrance. ,
The production control means is
It is configured to be able to execute a variable effect during the variable display of the identification information ,
A specific performance can be executed during the first special game and the second special game, and the specific performance is selected based on a performance mode selected from a plurality of predetermined performance modes. It is configured to be executable in a manner indicating the result of the round game ,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of effect modes is the same as at least a part of the effect mode of the variable effect that can be executed during the variable display.

Images